0% found this document useful (0 votes)

408 views

Appendix VIII - Civil and Structural Scope of Work

Uploaded by

jaganraj

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

408 views

Appendix VIII - Civil and Structural Scope of Work

Uploaded by

jaganraj

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 140

APPENDIX- VIII

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

APPENDIX-Villa
I
CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK
REVISIONS

PREPAlOD BY: ROL

DATE:

CHK'DBY:
FOR

C ,4 IJIL".:.., CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV BSP

201'2-1l6-e'

OPERA1'ING DD'ARTMl:NT

PTS-11 EN367

BY:

DATE: 2012-06-06

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR (ATIACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "8" OF CONTRACT NO. .. ....I....)
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANTNO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SHEDGUM·2 380/115kV BSP
JOB ORDER NO. 1
T448 A APPENDIX·Vllla
OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS·11 EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK

The CIVIL and STRUCTURAL WORK for "Construction of Shedgum-2 380/115kV BSP" under
this PROJECT shall include, but not necessarily limited to the following. The following
drawings shall be referred to in conjunction with this section.

• Drawing ET-908854, Sheet 1 and 2 Substation Location and Site Access Road Plan
• Drawing ET-908855, Substation Site Development Plan & Details
• Drawing ET-908861, Substation Layout
• Drawing ET-908862, Control Building Equipment Layout

On Lump Sum Tumkey basis the CONTRACTOR shall provide and undertake/construct the
following items:

REVISIONS
1. Topographic Survey.

PREPARED BY: ROL NOTE: Geotechnical report for the substation area will be provided by SEC.
DATE: 2ol2-A
CHK'PBY: .~ 2. Site clearing, excavation, backfilling and final grading of the substation yard area
-..-.-~

3. Asphalt pavlnq of the entire substation yard and parking area with 102mm thick asphalt,
asphalt road marking and parking layout, except the space for future expansion yard which
will be developed as per Drawing ET-908854, sheet 01 of 02. The crown elevation of the
substation yard shall be as per SEC Standard TES-P-119.19, Rev. 0 of Clause 7.4.
())V
CIPRIANO s. MAURICIO
4. Design and construction of asphalt access road 8.00 meters wide with 1.00 meter shoulder
on each side from the main drive gate to the existing asphalt road as shown in Drawing
21Jlz.. .... ET-908854. Construct 5.00 meters wide access road (outside the substation) with 1.00
meter shoulders from the access road to the gate at the northem side of the substation.
Ol'l'JlATfNG DEPARTMENT Thickness of asphalt shall be 102mm. The slope of embankment shall be protected with
50mm thick asphalt.
a. The access road starts from the main gate of the BSP then turns left to be connected
to the existing access road of existing Shedgum PIP as shown in Drawing ET-908854,
Sheet 2 of 2. At the intersection of the access road with the existing access road of
existing Shedgum PIP, provide acceleration and deceleration lanes that comply with
Ministry of Transport requirements.
b. The length of the access road is approximately 800 meters. CONTRACTOR shall
verify the actual total length. Portion of the access road shall be constructed at the
DATE: 2012-06-06
corridor of the existing 230kV overhead transmission line. CONTRACTOR shall
provide all required survey works.

c. All existing transmission line structures that are within 30 meters from the edge of the
asphalt access road shall be protected with concrete crash barriers (Jersey barriers).
Concrete crash barriers shall be installed around the transmission line structures to
THIS DRAWING ]S NOT
TO BE USED FOR protect the structures from vehicular traffic. Concrete crash barriers shall be painted
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING with stripes of yellow and black colors. Final design drawings shall be submitted to the
MATERIALS UNTll.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
COMPANY for review and approval.
d. Refer to Clause 2.06 of Appendix-Vlllb for other requirements of the access road.

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT NO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SHEDGUM·2 380/115kV BSP
JOB ORDER NO. 2
T448 A APPENDIX·Vllla
OF 0
SHEOGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS-11EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with M.O.T. and SARAMCO for road connection and
widening of existing road work. CONTRACTOR shall satisfy all requirements of M.O.T.,
SARAMCO and COMPANY in this regard.

5. Construct and install chain link perimeter fence to enclose the substation yard in
accordance with SEC Standard drawings TA-800113. Two (2) drive gates (6.00-meter
wide) and one (1) personnel gate (1.22-meter wide). Fence shall comply with COMPANY
Materials Standard Specification 7Q-TMSS-02 and TES-S-101 for Safety & Security. Fence
shall be properly grounded in accordance with SEC Engineering Standard TES-P-
119.19.10. And location shall be as per Site Development Plan, Drawing ET-908855.

The slope of embankment shall be protected with 50mm thick asphalt all around the
substation and provide/install property markers with chain link as shown in Drawing ET-
908855.
REVISIONS
Provide type-IV fence with drive gate (6.00-meter wide) for space at the future expansion
PREJ"AREDBY: ROt and shall provide with 150mm thick gravel bedding see Drawing ET-908854 sheet 1 of 2.
DATE:

CRK'DBY:
6. Design and construct the following precast reinforced concrete buildings:

a. 380kV GIS building with cable tunnel and stepped access

b. 115kV GIS building with cable basement and stepped access
c. Control building with layout and requirements as shown in Drawing ET-908862

UJt/
CIPRIANO s. MAURIOO
The above buildings superstructure shall be with precast concrete walls. Building
SUbstructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

'01""" CONTRACTOR shall provide all the metallic cable trays, galvanized steel supports from
floor/wall/roof for the cables and necessary accessories at the basement. Provide
galvanized steel bridges with steel grating covers over the cables.
O1'ERATING D1!'PARnfENT

Fire/emergency exits shall be provided for the basements and cable tunnels. Fire rated
doors shall be provide between Cable tunnel and 380/115kV basement.

7. Design and construction of cable tunnels/ductbanks as shown in Drawing ET-908861 at

the following locations:

1'm
BY:

DATE: 1O:l1-06-Ofj
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Control cable tunnel between 380kV GIS building and control building
Control cable tunnel between control building and 115kV GIS building
Cable tunnel from 115kV GIS building up to gantry at southern side of the substation
Cable tunnel from 115kV GIS building up to gantry at northern side of the substation
Power cable tunnel from 115kV GIS bUilding up to T801, T802 and future T803
f. 13.8kV cable ductbank from SWitchgearroom up to T801 and T802
g. 13.8kV cable ductbank from SWitchgear room to RMU then up to 1.5 meter outside the
perimeter fence between corners 2 & 3.
h. 13.8kV cable ductbank from switchgear room up to station service transformers.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR Provide and install 200mm CMU partition walls in the cable tunnels where required in
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
Clause 2.02.B.1 of Appendix-XII.
CERTlFlED AND DATED

Provide and install 2-way hollow metal doors with minimum 3 hours fire rating at every
partition wall.

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT NO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV asp
JOB ORDER NO. 3
T448 A APPENDIX-Villa
OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS-11 EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

CONTRACTOR shall design and construct the tunnels/ductbanks crossing the roads inside
the substation considering the maximum load of the heaviest module/equipment of the
substation or the live load indicated in Clause 1.03.1 of Appendix-Vllib whichever gives
higher design moments and shears.

CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of the cable tunnels and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the cables installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. However, minimum width of cable tunnels shall be 5 meters.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all the metallic cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the
cables and necessary accessories.

CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of the cable ductbanks/trenches and shall
size them adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for
REVISIONS maintenance and operations at manholes, all future piping to be installed and all the cables
installations in this PROJECT plus 20% spare capacity.
ROL
PREPARED BY: --=;:::::".~

DATE: 2012-. 8. Design and construct firewalls between the 380/115kV transformers and 150MVAR reactor
CHK'DBY: -::it.\.~ and between station service transformers.
'--.""'"J..

9. Design, fabricate, provide and install rail tracks for movement of transformers T801 and
T802 including future transformers T803 and 150MVAR reactor. The top of the rail tracks
shall be at the same level as the top of transformer foundations. The transformer rails shall
rest on reinforced concrete ballasts/supports as shown in the conceptual drawinqs, Refer
ClFRlANO S. MAURICIO to Clauses 2.27.a and 2.27.b of Appendix-VII lb.

10. Design and construct the reinforced concrete foundations for the power transformers T801
and T802 including future transformers T803, station service transformers and 150MVAR
reactor.
OI'DtATING DIPARTMENI'
11. Install removable crash barriers with chain links around the power transformers and
PACUs.

13. Design and construct oil retention pits around all transformers and reactor.

14. Design and construct the concrete foundations of PACUs.

15. Provide and install raised floor at the communication room.

Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

DATE: 201~
-=:::::::"'--1
sufficient space for routing all the cables to be installed considering the ultimate substation
configuration plus 20% spare capacity. Minimum depth of raised floor shall be 900mm.

16. Design and construct reinforced concrete encased ductbanks with manholes to route all
the LV and control cables from control room to all the various outdoor equipment and to
the 115kV GIS building and 380kV GIS building.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these ductbanks and shall size them
FOR ORDERING adequately to accommodate the LV & control cables to be installed considering the
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED ultimate substation configuration plus 20% spare capacity.

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT NO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV BSP
JOB ORDER NO. 4
T448 A APPENDIX-Villa
OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS-11EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

The elevation of the top of the manholes shall be 100mm above the surrounding asphalt
finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All manholes within the substation
yard shall be of traffic type.
17. Design and construct dedicated reinforced concrete encased ductbanks including PVC
conduits, with rigid sub ducts and handholes to route the underground non-metallic fiber

I
optic cables from communication handholes to be located within five (5) meters from the
380kV/115kV take-off/gantry structures up to the communication handhole located at
maximum of 5m away from the communication room.

CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these concrete encased ductbanks and
shall size them adequately to accommodate four (4) 100mm 0 PVC conduits, type EB.
Provide and install two (2) 50mm diameter PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits from
the fiber optic cable joint box on the take-off structures to the communication handhole.
REVISIONS

Provide and install six (6) 50mm diameter PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits from
PREPARED BY: ---==-';--1
ROL
DATE: '0I2-l1A6 the communication handhole near the communication room to the raised floor. Four (4) of
CHK'DBY; ;~ the 50mm diameter conduits shall be provided with one (1) 25mm PVC flexible sub duct.
~~."
Spare RSGC conduits shall be capped with plastic nylon ropes inside.

The elevation of the top of the communication handholes shall be 100mm above the
surrounding asphalt finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All handholes
within the substation yard shall be of traffic type. The manholes shall not be located in
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO asphalt road or road marking.
18. Design, fabrication and erection of hot-clip galvanized steel supporting structures including
zot1-Olt-06
reinforced concrete foundations for all outdoor electrical equipment such as 380kVl115kV
SA, SF6 to Air Bushing, GIS bus ducts, outdoor CT, etc.
OPERATING DUARlMENT
19. Design, fabrication and installation of 380kV and 115kV latticed steel take-off
structures/gantries.

20. Design and construct reinforced concrete foundations of all 380kV and 115kV latticed steel
take-off structures/gantries. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the transmission line
CONTRACTOR.
21 . Design and provide overhead traveling crane for each of the GIS Buildings.
22. Fabrication and installation of permanent galvanized steel caged ladders for access to
DATE: 2ftlU16-416 roofs of GIS buildings, control building and overhead traveling cranes of 380kV and 115kV
GIS buildings.
23. Design and construction of reinforced concrete foundations for outdoor lighting poles,
security lighting poles and lightning masts.

TIDS DRAWING IS NOT 24. Design and construction of 6 X 6 meters reinforced concrete Store Room at 380kV GIS
TO BE USED
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
and 115kV GIS buildings
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
25. Construction of gatehouse, toilet, septic tank and seepage pits near the gatehouse.
Construct septic tank and seepage pits near the toilet of the control building.

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT NO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV BSP
JOB ORDER NO. S
T448 A APPENDIX·Vllla
OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS-11EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

Gatehouse shall be as per SEC Standard Drawing TA-800039. Rev. 0, TA-800040, Rev.O,
TA-800041. Rev. 0 and TA-800042, Rev. O.

26. Water connection for toilets shall be tapped from the municipal water supply. In case
municipal water line is not available within 200 meter radius from the property line, a
provision for storage tank-truck filling shall be provided. Refer to Clause 7.2.17 of
Company Engineering Standard TES-P-119.19.

27. Substation signboard shall be installed near the drive gate in addition to the signboard of
the substation building as per Standard Drawing TC-800003. Rev.01. Substation signboard
at the gatehouse shall be as per Standard Drawing TA-800111, Rev. O. CONTRACTOR
shall coordinate with the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE for the appropriate SEC logo.

28. Suspended/drop false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communication room,
REVISIONS office room, AC/DC Room, Relay Test Room, Corridor, entrance, and toilet. Clear height
from floor to false ceiling shall be 3.70 meters. The false ceiling requirement shall be as
'PREPARED BY: ROL per TES-P-119.19.
DATE:

CDK'DBY: 29. Provide superficial storm drainage system to drain water outside the Substation.

30. Design and construct reinforced concrete Fire Pump house, underground reinforced
concrete Water Tank and fire water piping and trenches with precast concrete cover.

31. All existing underground utilities, which maybe uncovered or otherwise affected by the
aw
ClPlUANO S. MAURIOO
excavation work, shall be relocated by the CONTRACTOR, as required. Permits shall be
obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the Agencies/Companies concemed.
2012-06-06 32. For other requirements, refer to the Company Standard TES-P-119.19. All other items that
are not mentioned but are required to finish the project shall be provided by the
OPERATING DEfARTMENT CONTRACTOR.

33. Appendix-Vilib shall be applicable to this Appendix, except the following Clauses;

a. Clause 2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY

CONTRACTOR
b. Clause 2.03 SOIL ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
c. Clause 2.04 SOIL THERMAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
d. Clause 2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION
DATE: 1011-fl6.O(i
e. Clause 2.10 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDING WITH CABLE ENTRY ROOM
f. Clause 2.11 COOLING TOWER

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

*** END OF APPENDIX-Villa ****
TO BE USED FOR
CONSlRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTR.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

CIVIL SCOPE OF WORK FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF PLANT NO INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SHEDGUM·2 380/115kV BSP
JOB ORDER NO. 6
T448 A APPENDIX-Villa
OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA PTS·11EN367
6
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

I APPENDIX-Vllib

REVISIONS
STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA,
TECHNICAL & MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARED BY: ROL

DATE: 201Jc.(Ni.06

CHK'DBY: .~
'J'-'
FOR

~
t;1JI "
4r/~
c RIANO s. MAURICIO

201,.....
CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV BSP

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

PTS-11 EN367

DATE: 2ft12-06-06

(ATIACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B" OF CONTRACT NO 1 )

THIS DRAWING ]S NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

[ROLl
PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.

JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-VIlib 1

T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

DESIGN CRITERIA

1.01 GENERAL 05
1.02 PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAUCIVIL CALCULATIONS 05
1.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 08
1.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING STRUCTURES 09
1.05 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES 09
REVISIONS
II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PllD'AREDBY: ROL

DATE: 2.01 GENERAL 11

CBK'DBY; 2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED 11
BY CONTRACTOR
2.03 SOIL ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS 12
2.04 SOIL THERMAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS 12
auJ
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO 2.05 EARTHWORKS 13
2.06 ASPHALT ACCESS ROAD TO SUBSTATION 13
1012-06-1)6
2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION 13
2.08 SLOPE PROTECTION 13
OPItRATlNGDEPARTMENT
2.09 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDINGS WITH CABLE 14
BASEMENT
2.10 SWITCHGEAR & CONTROL BUILDING WITH CABLE 18
ENTRY ROOM
2.11 COOLING TOWER 22
2.12 CABLE TUNNELS 23
2.13 ROAD MARKING AND PARKING AREAS 23
2.14 GATEHOUSE AND TOILET 23
DATE: 2012-06-06
2.15 GROUNDING OF REBARS AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC 24
2.16 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES 24
2.17 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES 24
2.18 CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS 25
TInS DRAWING IS Nor
TO BE USED FOR 2.19 CONCRETE COVER 25
CONSTRUcn:ON OR
FOR
MATEIUALS
ORDERING
IJNTIL
2.20 CONCRETE CABLE TRENCHES 25
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.21 CONCRETE PROTECTION 26
2.22 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING REQUIREMENTS 26
AND APPLICATION

[ROLl

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Cont'd)
SECTION

2.23 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 32

I
2.24 SEPTIC TANKS AND SEEPAGE PITS 32
2.25 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES AND COVERS 33
2.26 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT 33
STRUCTURESITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES
2.27 POWER TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS 33
2.28 FIREWALLS 34
g "" N _

2.29 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS 34

REVISIONS
2.30 COMMUNICATION DUCTBANKS AND HANDHOLES 35
I'REPARED BY: ROL 2.31 ELECTRICAL DUCTBANKS AND MANHOLES 36
DATE: 2.32 SUBSTATION SIGNBOARD 37
CHK'DBY; 2.33 PERIMETER FENCE & GATES/PRECAST BOUNDARY WALLS 37
2.34 PROTECTIVE CRASH BARRIERS WITH CHAIN LINK 37
2.35 ACCESS LADDER TO ROOF 38
2.36 ROOF AND CANOPY WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 38
[IJJ/ 2.37 CABLE BASEMENT, CABLE TUNNEL AND CABLE ENTRY 40
CIPRIANO S. MAURIOO

ROOM WATERPROOFING
101......
2.38 LIGHTING AND LIGHTNING MAST STEEL MONOPOLES 40
2.39 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS 41
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
2.40 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK 41
2.41 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CRACK INJECTION REPAIR 42

III MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

~~:l 3.01 GENERAL 44

!Ml1l
DATE: #' 1012-06-06
3.02
3.03
3.04
CONCRETE
CEMENT & SAND SCREED
REINFORCING STEEL
44
44
45
3.05 STRUCTURAL STEEURAIL TRACK STEEL 45
3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS, MORTAR AND GROUT 46
3.07 HOLLOW METAL DOORS 47
THIS DRAWING IS NOT 3.08 WALLAND ROOF THERMAL INSULATION 54
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR 3.09 FIBERGLASS WALL INSULATION 54
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
3.10 DRY WALL SYSTEM AND GYPSUM BOARDS 55
3.11 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 57
3.12 ASPHALT CONCRETE 60
3.13 BASE AND SUB-BASE MATERIALS 60
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380J115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 3
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Cont'd)
SECTION

3.14 BACKFILL MATERIALS 60

I
3.15 PAINTING SYSTEM 60
3.16 PVCWATERSTOPS 61
3.17 NON-SHRINK GROUT 62
3.18 POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 63
3.19 COAL TAR EPOXY 63
3.20 CEMENTITIOUS ELASTOMERIC IMPERMEABLE MEMBRANE 64
3.21 REPAIR MORTARS 64
REVISIONS
3.22 CONCRETE SURFACER 64
rREPARm BY: ROL 3.23 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS 65
DATE;
3.24 EPOXY ZINC-RICH PAINT/PRIMER 65
CHK'DBY: 3.25 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS 66
3.26 SUB DUCTS 66
3.27 GEOTEXTILES 67
3.28 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER/BACK-UP MATERIALS 67
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO 3.29 PROTECTION BOARD/COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER BOARD 67
3.30 POLYETHYLENE SHEETS 68
201.......
3.31 ALUMINUM FLASHING 69
3.32 CONCRETE EPOXY FLOOR DUST PROOFER & HARDENER 69
OPEllA11NG DEl"ARTMENT
3.33 ROOF DRAINS 71
3.34 WATER TANK 72
3.35 JOINT SEALANTS 72
3.36 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT 74
3.37 HANDRAILS 75
3.38 RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM 75
3.39 FIRE-STOP AND SMOKE-STOP PRODUCTS 80
3.40 COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAYS 83
DATE: 2012-06-06
3.41 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS 83
3.42 CERAMIC TILES 83
3.43 DOOR/FINISH SCHEDULE AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 84

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERlNG
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB OROERNO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 4
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

SECTION I - STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA

1.01 GENERAL

This section broadly outlines the PROJECT'S design criteria and shall be read in
conjunction with the attached PROJECT drawings, the COMPANY Engineering,
Construction and Material Standard Specifications and the latest edition of associated
international Standards and Codes.

This section also covers mandatory requirements governing the preparation of structural
calculations for the design of all steel and concrete structures (super & substructures)
including equipment foundations.

REVISIONS
1.02 PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAUCIVIL CALCULATIONS
PREPAREDBY: DOL

A. Scope
CHK'DBV:
This Specification covers mandatory requirements governing the preparation of structural
calculations for the design of all steel and concrete structures including
structure/equipment foundations.

au/
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO The criteria and general design outlined below shall be adopted as applicable to the basic
design of the structures, and shall also serve as the basis in the development of detailed
design by the CONTRACTOR subject to necessary adjustments and implementation
particularly in consideration of geologic conditions of the site.

OPERATINGDEPARTMENT B. Conflicts and Deviations

Any conflict between this Specification and other applicable COMPANY Engineering
Standards, Material System Specifications, Standard Drawinqs or Industry Standards,
Codes and forms shall be resolved in writing by the COMPANy.

C. Purposes of Calculations

The purposes of calculations are as follows:

DATE; 2G1~

1. To enable the designer to arrive at designs, which are safe, feasible and
economical
2. To provide a record for future reference
3. To satisfy code and/or COMPANY requirements as to the adequacy of the design
nos DRAWING IS NOT 4. To facilitate determination of the effects of possible future modifications
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL D. Units
CERTIFIED AND DATED

All calculations shall be done using SI metric units, except when calculations are made in
compliance with a code, or using a computer program, which has not yet been metricated.
All the conventional calculations shall be converted to metric units.
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 5
T448 A PTS·11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

E. Symbols

Symbols used for steel design shall have the connotation as in the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction, ACI Manual of Concrete Practice. Other symbols shall conform to the
corresponding International Codes and Standards that are referenced in the applicable

I COMPANY Standard.

In general, the connotation of all symbols used throughout the calculations shall be stated
at the beginning of the calculations.

The connotations of symbols used only locally shall be stated immediately before or after
the equations in which they are used.

REVISIONS F. Equations

PREl"AREDBY: ROL All equations, graphs, nomographs, etc., used in the calculations shall be:
DATE:

CHK'DBV:
1. Derived in the calculations, or
2. Referred to in the relevant standard, giving clause number, or
3. If taken from a text book, accompanied by a copy of the pertinent lJage(s)
4. Commonly used and easily recognized equations such as PL, WL2/8, etc., need not
be derived or have references provided.

G. Assumptions

Assumptions on which calculations are based shall be listed in an orderly manner.

CONTRACTOR shall clearly spell out the analysis/design methodology/philosophy

OPERATING DEPARTMENT adopted in the design of super and substructures; the decision to adopt a particular
analysis/design method shall solely be on the discretion of the COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE.

H. Parameters

~:/ The values of all parameters shall be stated at the beginning of the calculations.

r:;.o/!!!!£..fl
.
Justification need not be given for commonly accepted values, e.g. Young's modulus,
Poisson's ratios, coefficients of expansion, etc. However, all other parameters shall be
DATE: 2012-06-06 justified either by quoting a source (e.g., soil report or study), or by brief reasoning or
reference to a standard or code. This, in particular, applies to the following:

1. Temperature differentials
2. Allowable ground bearing pressures, settlements and differential settlements
THIS DRAWING IS NOT 3. Wind pressure calculations based on the appropriate basic wind speed, exposure
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCfION OR factor, height, shape, gust and importance factor
IDa ORDERING
MATERIALS UNI1L
CERTIFIED AND DATED I. General Presentation

The presentation of calculations shall be in accordance with the following procedures and
requirements.

[ROLl

1. The heading shall provide the following information:

a. Name of the originator of the calculations and the name of the checker
b. The title, which shall clearly describe the contents of the calculations
c. The date the calculations were made

2. Table of Contents and list of all codes and references used

3. All calculations shall be checked, initialed as checked before being sent to the
responsible Project Manager.

4. Calculations shall have sufficient number of sub-headings to indicate clearly what is

being calculated or designed. Both sub-headings and final results shall be
underlined for easy location.
REVISIONS

5. Sufficient explanation shall be given so that calculation methods are easily

comprehensible. For this reason, simple clear sketches should be liberally used.
Calculations whose approach is not adequately described will not be accepted by
the COMPANY.

6. Calculations are to be in the English language throughout.

7. The cover sheet of each calculation package shall be assigned a COMPANY

CIPRIANOS. MAURICIO drawing number to identify the calculations for a particular Job Order, and for
inclusion in COMPANY permanent records. Individual calculation sheets follOWing
"n,..... the cover sheet shall be consecutively numbered (1,2,3, etc.).

8. Calculation packages should be limited to pertinent information, voided calculation

OPERATINGDEPARTMENT sheets shall be removed if these sheets do not contain useful information.

9. Design calculations shall be prepared in computer excel sheets in company

acceptable format. Design calculations shall also be submitted in Abode Portable
Document Format (PDF). These shall be submitted in a CD during the definitive
design stage to aid in the review.

J. Computer Calculations

DATE: 10'....... Computer calculations shall be in accordance with the following guidelines:

1. All computer models shall be accompanied by the corresponding input and output
data showing the structural shape, integrity of structure, loads applied and the
joints/members layout, etc. Data provided as computer input shall be clearly
1HIS DRAWING ]S NOT distinguished from those computed in the program. The first sheet of each computer
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR run shall be signed by the engineer responsible for the structural design. A program
FOR ORDERING
MATEJUALS lJN1U, description (user's gUide) shall be submitted upon request and contain the
CERTIFIED AND DATED information necessary to determine the nature and extent of the analysis, verify the
input data, interpret the results with the recommendations such as soil report,
COMPANY minimum requirements and location requirements, etc., and determine
whether the computations comply with these recommendations.
[ROL)

2. A computer CD containing a soft copy of the input and output files shall be furnished
to the COMPANY for all computer models to aid in the review.

3. Computer programs such as STAAD.Pro 2007 is acceptable programs.

4. A summary of the analysis results that are extracted from the computer output shall

I be provided. This summary should clearly state the achieved results (maximum
interaction ratios found, deflection ratios, justification of the output with
requirements, etc.).

1.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. The concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with the requirements specified
REVISIONS
in TES-P-119.18 and TES-P-119.19. In addition, load combinations, analysis/design
PREPARED BY: ---'=:---1
IlOL methodology adopted in the structural design and construction of SWitchgear and control
buildings (super and substructures) shall be in accordance with Building Code
DATE:
Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (ACI 318M-05) and International
CHK'DBY:
Building Code (IBC) latest edition.

B. Loading criteria shall be in accordance with TES-P-119.19. For any additional load
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSI/ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
t'4!
CIPRIANO S. MAUlUCIO
and Other Structures", latest edition, shall be followed.

Live load for control rooms shall not be less than 7.5kN/m 2 as per Clause 4.2.2.b.iii of
2012-06-06
TES-P-119.18, Rev.O.

C. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement,

OPERATINGDEPARTMENT latest edition, shall be followed.

D. The building frame structures shall be designed to support any additional dead loads to
be hung from the roof such as NC equipment, NC ducts, false ceiling, lighting fixtures,
piping, electrical equipment (disconnect switches, post insulators, etc.), cable trays
carrying power and control cables.
rt:F2
~O~lJ.AA
BY:
E. The building structural system shall be designed to resist all loads and stresses resulting
from lifting, handling, erection and transportation of electrical equipment.
DATE: f 2012-06-86

F. The building structural system shall be designed to withstand the overhead traveling
crane loads and its impact for lifting, handling and transportation of all electrical
equipment. Crane beams, support brackets and connections to columns or roof beams
shall be designed for impact loads.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING G. Buildings and structures shall be designed to Withstand the seismic forces. Seismic loads
MATEIUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
shall be computed based on the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition.

H. Building structures shall be designed for either seismic load or wind loads, whichever
governs, considering the corresponding load combination.

[ROLl

J. Live load for cable tunnels and ductbanks that are likely to be crossed by heavy
equipment shall be H20 truck loading. When the depth of fill above the top slab of the
cable tunnel and ductbank is 0.60m or less, treat the wheels as concentrated loads
directly applied on their top for determining design moments and shears.

1.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES

A. Loading criteria shall be as per TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01. For any additional load
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSI/ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and other Structures", latest edition, shall be followed. All the structures supporting
equipment with flexible conductors at top shall be latticed steel structures. Structures
supporting rigid conductors on top shall be steel structures.
REVISIONS
B. Steel structures (supporting rigid conductors on top) shall comply with the requirements of
TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01 except that the equipment steel structures shall be designed,
PREPABID BY: --==--I
ROL
fabricated and erected as per American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
DATE:
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings of the Manual of Steel Construction, latest
CHK'DBY:
edition. The design to be adopted shall be based on "Allowable Stress Design" method.

Increase in allowable stresses by 1/3, in case of wind and seismic loading, acting alone or
in combination with the design dead and live loads is not allowed, because wind or
avJ
CIPllIANO SoMAURICIO
seismic forces/loading are considered as primary loads.

C. Latticed steel structures (supporting equipment with flexible conductors at top) shall be
2011406
fabricated conforming to 20-TMSS-01, Rev. 01. Design, fabrication and erection of
latticed steel structures, equipment supports with flexible conductor at the top and the
structures supporting rigid conductors with more than three meters height shall be as per
OPERATING DEPARTMENT TES-P-119.09, Rev. 01 and ASCE Standard 10-97 "Design of Latticed Steel
Transmission Structures", Latest Edition.

D. The equipment support structure foundations shall be designed as per the requirements
of TES-P-119.18. In addition, the analysis/design methodology adopted in the structural
design of reinforced concrete foundations for steel structures shall be in accordance with
ACI 318M-05 "Building ReqUirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary".

E. For foundation reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete

DAn: 2012-fli.06 Reinforcement", latest edition, shall be followed.

1.05 LAnlCED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR A. Loading criteria shall be as per TE8-P-119.09, Rev. 01. For any additional load
CONSI'RUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
requirements, clarifications, etc., ANSI/ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
MATERIALS UNI1L and Other Structures" shall be followed.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

B. Structural members shall be fabricated from materials conforming to 20-TMSS-01, Rev.

01. Design, fabrication and erection of latticed steel structures shall be as per TES-P-

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INOEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801 115kV asp APPENDIX-Vlllb 9
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

119.09, Rev. 01 and ASCE Standard 10-97 "Design of Latticed Steel Transmission
Structures", Latest Edition.

C. The gantry/take-off structure foundations shall be designed as per the requirements of

TES-P-119.18. In addition, the analysis/design methodology adopted in the structural
design of reinforced concrete foundations for steel structures shall be in accordance with

I ACI 318M-05 "Building Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary".

D. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement",

latest edition, shall be followed.

"* END OF SECTION I "*

REVISIONS

I'IlEPARm BY: _-='--1

ROL

DATE:

CHK'DBY:

CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO

'01......

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

DATE: 2012-06-06

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USID FOR
CONSTRUCllON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS tJN'IR
CERTIFIED AND DATED

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGEND. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 10
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

SECTION II - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.01 GENERAL

This section broadly outlines the technical specifications of the major materials required
for the satisfactory and complete construction of the PROJECT. The specifications

i outlined herein shall be read in conjunction with the PROJECT drawings, the COMPANY
Engineering, Construction and Material Standard Specifications and the associated
international Standards and Codes.

2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR

A. Prior to any design WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall hire a Geotechnical Consultant,
REVISIONS
approved by the COMPANY, who shall undertake the geotechnical site soil investigations.
The geotechnical investigation agency representative shall visit the site, familiarize
PREPARED BY: --'==--f
ROL
himself at the site and submit a detailed preliminary geotechnical proposal on the
DATE:
following for COMPANY review:
CBK'DBY:

1. Scope of WORK
2. Field Investigation method (boring and sampling)
3. Laboratory investigations (soil tests)
4. Foundation types for different soil types, conditions and recommendations
CIPRIANO S. MAUlUClO 5. Identification of potential problems such as settlements, de-watering problems, rock
excavation, etc., and their solutions
6. Soil electrical and thermal resistivity measurement method and procedure
7. Recommendations for soil improvement if sabkhah soils are encountered

OPERATINGDKI'ARTMENT
The minimum number of boreholes to be drilled shall be ten (10) boreholes for buildings
and six (6) boreholes for equipment foundations."

CONTRACTOR shall not start the investigation and boring until they receive the
approval of preliminary geotechnical proposal from the COMPANY.

B. The report shall also include an A-size drawing in SEC format (drawing number, index,
plant number, etc.) and showing the location of boreholes and soil electrical and thermal
BY.
resistivity measurement points.
DATE: f'201~
C. Minimum depth of each borehole shall be 2B, where B is the width of the foundation, and
in no case shall be less than 8 meters. In case of mat foundation, the borehole depth
should be at least twice the mat width. For augured drilled soil piers, the borehole depth
shall be at least 3 meters below the bottom of the pier foundation. Sufficient number of
THIS DRAWING IS NOT soil borings shall be taken so that a soil profile can be drawn with reasonable accuracy to
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
serve as the basis for the foundation design. Borehole for normal dry soil under raft
FOR ORDERlNG foundation shall be ten (10) meters maximum and loose soil boring depth shall be
MATERlALS Ul<I1L
CERTIFIED AND DATED increased till the hard strata is achieved. The final location and number of boreholes
shall be solely decided by the COMPANY.

D. Final geotechnical report submission shall be strictly in accordance with the requirements
of PTS-08EM313 (attached in this Appendix as reference).
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 11
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

E. When sabkhah soils are encountered at the site, CONTRACTOR shall improve the
sabkhah as per the recommendations of TCS-Q-113.02.

F. CONTRACTOR shall hire a professional soil agency with adequate experience and
knowledge of improvement of sabkhah soils. The agency shall be acceptable to the

I COMPANY.

The geotechnical agency (who has performed the soil investigation) together with the
agency responsible for improvement of sabkhah soil shall recommend the improvement
technique suitable to the sabkhah soil encountered. All the related calculations and
documents for arriving at the soil parameters (which are necessary for foundation design)
such as soil bearing capacity, settlement, etc., and improvement techniques shall be
submitted for COMPANY review and approval.
REVISIONS

PREPARED BY; ROL

---'::::'::"'-1
The final decision for adopting a particular method for improvement of sabkhah
soil shall solely be decided by the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and shall be
DATE:
binding to the CONTRACTOR.
CHK'DBY:

The CONTRACTOR shall not start the design of foundations and earthwork until the
soil investigation report is reviewed and accepted by the COMPANY.

CIPRIANO S. MAUlUOO
2.03 SOIL ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS
,.........
A. Soil resistivity measurements shall be carried out using four-point Wenner arrangements
as per IEEE-81 and TES-P-119.10
OPERATINGDEI'AR'I'MEHT
B. Soil resistivity measurements shall be carried out at different locations of the
plot/proposed ground grid area so as to cover the entire grounding grid area. Soil
resistivity measurements shall be made at the following locations:

1. Center of the proposed grounding grid area in four (4) different directions at 45°
between directions to cover the central area of the grounding grid

2. Near the different sides of the grounding grid area with direction parallel to the
grounding grid sides

3. Additional points based on the size and shape of the grounding grid area

C. The COMPANY shall solely decide the final location of soil resistivity measurement points
1108 DRAWING IS NOT
and method.
TO BE usm FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATEIUA1S UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 2.04 SOIL THERMAL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS

CONTRACTOR shall conduct the soil thermal resistivity tests. Soil samples shall be taken
from at least two (2) locations along the proposed ductbank route.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 12
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

2.05 EARTHWORKS

The site clearing, rough grading, excavation, controlled fill, sub-base course and base
course placement and compaction, etc., shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-
113.02.

2.06 ASPHALT ACCESS ROAD TO SUBSTATION

A. CONTRACTOR shall construct asphalt access road to the proposed substation drive gate
from the existing asphalt road.

B. Design and construction of access road shall conform to TES-P-122.11 and TES-P-
REVISIONS 119.19.

PREPARED BY: ROL

-.'::=..., C. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary road traffic warning signs such as stop,
DATE:
speed limit, caution slow down, direction, etc., speed humps and substation informative
CBK'DBY:
signs at the intersection of proposed asphalt access road and the existing asphalt road.
Speed humps shall be provided at 100 meters from substation and existing asphalt road.

D. The access road shall be 8.0 meters wide with 1.0 meter wide shoulder on each side. The
slope of embankment shall be protected with 50mm thick asphalt.
CI4!
CII'IUANO S. MA1JIUClO
E. Asphalt concrete paving works shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.
Minimum thickness of combined binder and wearing course shall be 102mm (64mm thick
class "A" asphalt binder course and 38mm thick Class "C" asphalt wearing course).

F. Base and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01 and TCS-Q-
OI'ERATINGDEPARTMENT
113.02. Minimum thickness of base course shall be 300mm, Class "B" as per TCS-Q-
113.02 with liquid limit of 25% and Plasticity Index of 4-8% maximum. Sub-base materials
shall conform to TCS-Q-113.02.

2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION

Shifting sand and sand dunes within a distance of 200m from the proposed fence/wall
around the substation shall be removed and graded. The area shall be stabilized by
DATE: 101%-06-06
spraying oil or emulsified asphalt material as recommended in TCS-Q-113.01, TCS-Q-
113.02 and TES-P-122.11.

Reinforced concrete interceptor channel shall be installed at the cut portion of the
proposed substation. Interceptor channel shall drain water away from the substation
THIS DRAWING ]8 NOT
TO BE USED FOR fence.
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTO..
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.08 SLOPE PROTECTION

Slope protection shall be as recommended in TCS-Q-113.02.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 13
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

2.09 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDINGS WITH CABLE BASEMENT

A. Design and construction of switchgear and control buildings shall satisfy the requirements
of TES-P-119.19.
!5
B. The switchgear and control building is a reinforced concrete structure. Provide cable
..~.
00
basement at locations if shown in the Control Building Floor Plan. The finished floor
elevation of the GIS & control bUildings shall be 300mm higher than the crown elevation
EL= ± 0.00 of the substation yard.

C. All required clearances of the equipment from walls or columns shall be provided as per
TES-P-119.19. In addition, the following minimum height clearances shall be maintained:
0
z ~ M
-
REVISIONS GIS room 7.00 m
(Subject to change based on the GIS equipment requirements & maintenance of light/fire detectors)
rUPAREDBY: ROL
Minimum hook height 5.00 m
DATE: '.I~ (Subject to change based on the GIS equipment manufacturer recommendation)
CHK'DBY: ~
~)( ...
Control room, battery room, communications room, workshop,
Records room/office, toilet (finished floor to false ceiling) 3.70m
lllt!\l!YIl!

Cable Basement clear height 3.30m

dJ/
CIPRIANOS. MAVlUCIO
Cable Tunnel clear height 3.00 m
,.........
D. The GIS room shall be equipped with an overhead traveling crane for assembly and
maintenance work purposes. The overhead traveling crane shall be able to handle the
heaviest module in the GIS buildings. All other requirements of the crane shall be as per
Ol'EllATING DEPARTMENT
TES-P-119.19.

E. Provision for future openings of adequate sizes shall be provided on the floor and walls.
Openings shall be sealed with three (3) hours fire stop and smoke stop products and
covered with fire coated material aluminum plates. Openings shall be made weather-tight
to prevent ingress of sand, dust and water.
tv ;r;r.rJj
BY:
MOt!..U"'i.:,'1.4, F. Cable basement shall be constructed as per TES-P-119.21 and TES-P-119.19 except
that it shall be provided with two (2) layers of 4mm thick each elastomeric bituminous
DATE: ' 201~
waterproofing membrane. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable
basement shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with
handrails shall be provided at the emergency exits. Cable basement shall have a clear
height of 3.30 meters from the highest part of basement floor to bottom of ground floor
beams.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING G. Provide unloadingfloading platforms not less than 2.50 meters in front of all double leaf
MATERIALS UNTo..
CERTIFIED AND DATED
doors/equipment doors. Reinforced concrete retaining wall 2.50 meters long shall be
provided at the edge of each platform. The sidewalk and the platform shall be at the same
elevation as the buildings.

(ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVlL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 14
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

H. Below grade construction, expansion and control joints in concrete structures shall be
provided with 200mm wide PVC water stops.

I. Building superstructures shall be reinforced concrete with precast concrete structural

frame and non-load bearing CMU walls.

I Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

318M-05.

Building substructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

J. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Interior and exterior walls shall be non-load bearing walls.
Minimum thickness of walls shall be 200mm. Interior and exterior walls shall be reinforced
with vertical/horizontal reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 and shall
REVISIONS be installed in each cell of CMU or 200mm on centers. Horizontal reinforcement shall be
prefabricated truss/ladder type and shall be installed in alternate layers of CMU walls. All
PREPARID BY: DOL
cells of the CMU for exterior and interior walls shall be fully grouted.
DAn::

CBK'DBY: K. Interior walls shall be plastered finish and painted. Exterior walls shall be tooled finished
and texture painted.

L. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable hot-dip galvanized checkered steel
plate covers inside the buildings.
CII'IUANO S. MA.UIUCIO
CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the piping installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the cable trays. galvanized
steel supports and necessary accessories.
OPERATINGDEPARTMENT

M. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable precast concrete covers outside the
buildings.

CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: cable bending radii, future
cable splicing (if required), space for maintenance and operations, all control and power
cables to be installed in this PROJECT plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall
provide all cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the cables & necessary accessories.
DATE: 2011-06-06
Concrete cable trenches shall be provided with seepage pit for water drainage.

N. Concrete roof slab shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that it shall
be provtded with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing
membrane or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR Reinforced concrete parapet walls shall be provided around the buildings with a minimum
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL height of 500mm above the highest part of the roof. The top elevation of the parapet wall
CERTIFIED AND DATED
shall be kept same throughout.

O. Canopies shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that they shall be
provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastorneric bituminous waterproofing membrane
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER. NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 15
T448 A PTS·11 EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane. The minimum projection of
canopy shall be 1.0 meter.

P. Toilets shall be provided as specified in TES-P-119.19. The finished floor level of the toilet
shall be 50mm lower than the finished floor level of the SWitchgear and control building.
The partition walls inside the toilet shall be non-load bearing CMU walls fully grouted with

I minimum thickness of 100mm. The walls shall be reinforced with vertical/horizontal

reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 minimum. Horizontal
reinforcement shall be prefabricated truss/ladder type. All cells of the CMU shall be fully
grouted. The walls shall be provided with ceramic, vitrified glazed tiles for full height.

The toilet cubicle door shall be hollow metal door. Accessories required inside the toilet
cubicle shall be as follows:

REVISIONS 1. Lock: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM A167
2. Lock/Unlock indicator: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM
l'REI' ARI!'J) BY: --''''''---I
ROL
A167
DATE: 3. Wall mounted dual, roll toilet paper dispenser: Stainless steel overall size 265 x 140
CHK'DBY: x 100mm depth
4. Surface mounted round towel bar: Bright polished stainless steel 600mm long x
75mm projection
5. Surface mounted coat hook: Stainless steel bright polished (three in number)
6. Metallic sign: 3mm thick aluminum/brass/stainless steel plate, 225mm high,
()IJ/ engraved letter as "Please flush the toilet after use." in Helvetica medium and its
CD"RIANO S. MAUlUCIO
Arabic translation. Fix to door with the use of adhesive.
,ot,...,...
Q. Doors shall be hollow metal doors and shall comply with the requirements of TES-P-
119.19, TES-P-119.21, HCIS-SEC-09 and HCIS-SEC-10.
OPERATlNGDEPAKl'Ml:NT
R. The location and number of doors shown on the layout drawing of the switchgear &
control building is conceptual design only, and may be varied depending upon the
requirements of operation and maintenance. The size of the doors shall be decided for
easy movement of the biggest size of equipment. However, the minimum sizes of doors
shall be as follows:

Door Type Location Minimum door size

(Subject to change based on the door
manufacturer's recommendation\
Single Leaf door for Battery Room, Net door width: 1.10 m
movement of Communication Room, Net door height: 2.50 m
eauioment Workshop
Single Leaf door for Toilet, Records Room, Net door width: 0.95 m
personnel movement entrance to cable basement, Net door height: 2.1 m
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
entrance to Building
TO BE usm FOR
CONSTRUCl1ON OR
Double Leaf door for Control Room, Store Room Net door width: 2.50 m
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
equipment movement Net door height: 2.50 m
CERTIFIED AND DATED Double leaf door for GIS Room, Store Room Net door width: 4.00 m
equipment movement Net door heloht; 4.00 m
Double leaf door for Mechanical Room Net door width: 2.50 m
equipment movement Net door heiQht: 2.50 m

[ROLl

s. Reinforced concrete door columns and lintels shall be provided on all door openings.
Door frames shall be fixed to the reinforced concrete elements firmly with the use of
expansion/anchor bolts.

T. The elevation of the floor surfaces on both sides of a door shall not vary by more than
13mm. The elevation shall be maintained on both sides of the doorway for a distance of

I at least equal to width of the widest leaf. Thresholds at doorways shall not be more than
13mm in height.

U. All stairs, landings, sidewalks, platforms and open elevated places with more than two (2)
steps (300mm) shall be provided with hand railings with zinc yellow paint. Stairs and
handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Approved aluminum nosing shall
be provided to all stair treads.

REVISIONS Ramps of not more than 12.5% slope shall be provided in front of all double doors.
Handrails along ramps shall be removable.
PREPAREDBY: ROL

DATE: v. Floor finishes and yard surfacing shall be as per TES-P-119.19. Loading/unloading
CHK'DBY: platforms in front of double leaf doors shall be provided with UV resistant (exposed type)
solvent free polyurethane or acrylic polymer modified cementitious material.

W. Battery room shall be provided with acid/caustic resistant floor and wall tiles up to roof
ceiling. Acid neutralizing dry pit shall be provided outside the building to collect the
CIJII
CIPRIANO S. MAURlOO
acid/caustic from the battery room. The finished floor level of the battery room shall be
50mm lower than the finished floor level of the switchgear and control building.
101~

X. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communications

room, records room/office, AC/DC Room, Relay Test Room, corridors, workshop, and
toilet. The false ceiling requirement shall be as per TES-P-119.19.
OPEHA11NG DEPARTMENT

Y. Raised access floor at the communications room shall be provided as per the
requirements of TES-P-119.19.

Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

sufficient space for routing cable to the associated equipment, but shall not be less than
900mm.

Z. The exterior of the buildings shall be painted with textured emulsion paint on tooled finish.
'01...... The interior of the switchgear and control bUilding shall be plastered and painted with flat
enamel semi-gloss paint. The ceiling shall be painted with textured matt enamel paint.
The firewalls shall be painted with textured emulsion paint. Basement walls and ceiling
shall be painted. Basement floor shall be coated with epoxy floor dust proofer and
hardener.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FUR
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
A1. Siabs-on-grade shall be as per TCS-Q-113.03. The minimum thickness of slab shall be
MATERJALS UNTIL
CERTIFlEDAND DATED
150mm reinforced with the required reinforcement.

81, Room identification plates and safety signboards for switchgear & control building fire
rated doors (indoor and outdoor locations) shall be installed on walls beside the doors by

[ROLl

screws. The plates/signboards shall be of aluminum with durable baked enamel

background. Message shall be screen-printed with UV resistant ink.

Safety signs on doors shall be installed as per the requirements of COMPANY Safety
Signs and Warning Devices Special Manual NO. 65-110.

The color shade for room identification letters shall be with Traffic Black (RAL 9017).
English Letter style shall be Helvetica and shall be uppercase only.

C1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel unistrut supports, clamps, etc., for
routing outgoing feeder cables.

D1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel bridges over the cables. The steel
bridges shall be covered with hot-dip galvanized steel grating.
REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: 1l0L

2.10 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDING WITH CABLE ENTRY ROOM
DATE:

COK'D BY: A. The switchgear and control building is a one storey structure with a cable entry room.
Design and construction of switchgear and control buildings shall satisfy the requirements
of TES-P-119.

B. The building foundation (isolated or mat foundation) shall be at least 1.20 meters below
{i(j/ the finished floor level of the cable entry room to accommodate the cable ductbank. The
CIPRIANOS. MAURICIO
space between cable entry floor slab and the foundation shall be filled with soil and
compacted as per TCS-Q-113.02 requirements. No retaining wall shall be provided below
the cable entry room slab.

C. Cable entry room walls shall be constructed of reinforced concrete and concrete hollow
OPERATINGDKl'ARTMENT
block masonry walls. The reinforced concrete walls shall be designed to support the
hollow block masonry walls load and to retain the soil in the substation yard. The
reinforced concrete walls shall be extended 300mm higher than the finished grade level.

D. All required clearances of the equipment from the walls or columns shall be provided as
per TES-P-119. In addition, the following minimum height clearances shall be maintained:

GIS room 7.00 m

(Subject to change based on the GIS equipment requirements & maintenance of Iightlfire detectors)

Minimum hook height 5.00 m

(Subject to change based on the GIS equipment manufacturer's recommendation)

Control room, battery room, communications room, workshop

Records room/office, toilet (finished floor to false ceiling) 3.70m
TIllS ORAWING ]8 NOT
TO BE USED FOR
cossraucnox OR
Cable Basement clear height 3.30 m
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlEn AND DATED
Cable Tunnel clear height 3.00 m

E. The GIS room shall be equipped with an overhead traveling crane for assembly and
maintenance work purposes. The overhead traveling crane shall be able to handle the
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVlL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 18
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

heaviest module in the GIS buildings. All other requirements of the crane shall be as per
TES-P-119.19.

F. Provision for future openings of adequate sizes shall be provided on floor and walls.
Openings shall be sealed with three (3) hours fire stop and smoke stop products and
covered with fire coated material aluminum plates. Openings shall be made weather-tight

I to prevent ingress of sand, dust and water.

G. Cable entry room shall be constructed as per TES-P-119.21 and TES-P-119.19 except
that it shall be provided with two (2) layers of 4mm thick each elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable entry
room shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with handrails
shall be provided at the emergency exits. Cable entry room shall have a clear height of
3.00 meters from the highest part of cable entry room floor to bottom of ground floor
REVISIONS beams.
PREPAREDBV: ---=:=--/
HOL
H. Provide unloading/loading platforms not less than 2.50 meters in front of all double leaf
DATE: doors/equipment doors. Reinforced concrete retaining wall 2.50 meters long shall be
CHK'DBY: provided at the edge of each platform. The sidewalk and the platform shall be at the same
elevation as the buildings.

I. Below grade construction, expansion and control joints in concrete structures shall be
provided with 200mm wide PVC water stops.
Ctt!
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO
J. Building superstructures shall be reinforced concrete with precast concrete structural
2011-06-06 frame and non-load bearing CMU walls.

Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

318M-OS.
OnRATING DEFARTMENT

Building substructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

K. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Interior and exterior walls shall be non-load bearing walls.
Minimum thickness of walls shall be 200mm. Interior and exterior walls shall be reinforced
with vertical/horizontal reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 and shall
be installed in each cell of CMU or 200mm on centers. Horizontal reinforcement shall be
prefabricated truss/ladder type and shall be installed in alternate layers of CMU walls. All
DAn:: 2012-06-06
cells of the CMU for exterior and interior walls shall be fully grouted.

L. Interior walls shall be plastered finish and painted. Exterior walls shall be tooled finished
and texture painted.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT M. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable hot-dip galvanized checkered steel
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
plate covers inside the buildings.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNnL
CERTIFIED AND DATED CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the piping installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. CONTRACTOR shall provide all the cable trays, galvanized
steel supports and necessary accessories.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 38OJ115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 19
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

N. Construct concrete cable trenches with removable precast concrete covers outside the
buildings.

CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of these trenches and shall size them
adequately, taking into consideration the following aspects: cable bending radii, future
cable splicing (if required), space for maintenance and operations, all control and power
cables to be installed in this PROJECT expansion plus 20% spare capacity.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the cables &
necessary accessories. Concrete cable trenches shall be provided with seepage pit for
water drainage.

O. Concrete roof slab shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that it shall
be provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing
REVISIONS
membrane or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane.
PBEPAIlED BY: ---'==---1
RDL
Reinforced concrete parapet walls shall be provided around the building with a minimum
DATE:
height of 500mm above the highest part of the roof. The top elevation of the parapet wall
CHK'DBY:
shall be kept same throughout.

P. Canopies shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19 except that they shall be
provided with one (1) layer of 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous waterproofing membrane
or one (1) layer of 1.5mm thick PVC waterproofing membrane. The minimum projection of
CIPll1ANO S. MAURICIO canopy shall be 1.00 meter.

1&11-86-06
Q. Toilet shall be provided as specified in TES-P-119.19. The finished floor level of the toilet
shall be 50mm lower than the finished floor level of the switchgear and control building.

OPERATING DEI'ARTMENT The partition walls inside the toilet shall be non-load bearing CMU walls fUlly grouted with
minimum thickness of 100mm. The walls shall be reinforced with vertical/horizontal
reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement shall be 12mm 0 minimum. Horizontal
reinforcement shall be prefabricated truss/ladder type. All cells of the CMU shall be fully
grouted. The walls shall be provided with ceramic, vitrified glazed tiles for full height.

The toilet cubicle door shall be hollow metal door. Accessories required inside the toilet
cubicle shall be as follows:

1. Lock: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM A167

2. Lock/Unlock indicator: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM
A167
3. Wall mounted dual, roll toilet paper dispenser: Stainless steel overall size 265 x 140
x 1OOmm depth
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
4. Surface mounted round towel bar: Bright polished stainless steel 600mm long x
CONSTRUCTION OR 75mm projection
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTD... 5. Surface mounted coat hook: Stainless steel bright polished (three in number)
CERTIFIED AND DATED
6. Metallic sign: 3mm thick aluminum/brass/stainless steel plate, 225mm high,
engraved letter as "Please flush the toilet after use." in Helvetica medium and its
Arabic translation. Fix to door with the use of adhesive.

(ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV SSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 20
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
;;i
tl SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,4~ ~.:l.,.....n 4.s.;o1l\

$
'"
;, R. Doors shall be hollow metal doors and shall comply with the requirements of TES-P-
C 119.19, TES-P-119.21, HCIS-SEG-09 and HCIS-SEC-10.

S. The location and number of doors shown on the layout drawing of the switchgear &
control building is conceptual design only, and may be varied depending upon the
s requirements of operation and maintenance. The size of the doors shall be decided for

~..
easy movement of the biggest size of equipment. However, the minimum sizes of the
~
doors shall be as follows:
" Minimum door size
Door Type Location
(Subject to change based on the door
manufacturer's recommendation)
Single Leaf door for Battery Room, Records Net door width: 1.10 m
c:i
z ... N
- movement of equipment Room, Communication
Room, Workshop
Net door height: 2.50 m
REVISIONS
Single Leaf door for Toilet, entrance to cable Net door width: 0.95 m
PREPARED BY: ROL personnel movement entry room, entrance to Net door height: 2.10 m
Building
DATE: 20'''-
CBK'D BY: ~ Double Leaf door for Control Room, Store Room Net door width: 2.50 m
<.y~,) equipment movement Net door height: 2.50 m
Double leaf door for GIS Room, Store Room Net door width: 4.00 m
~
equipment movement Net door height: 4.00 m
Double leaf door for Mechanical Room Net door width: 2.50 m
all
CIPRIANO SoMAVRIC10
equipment movement Net door heiaht: 2.50 m

T. Reinforced concrete door columns and lintels shall be provided on all door openings.
,.,'""'"'" Door frames shall be fixed to the reinforced concrete elements firmly with the use of
expansion/anchor bolts.
OPERATING DIiJ'ARTMENT
U. The elevation of the floor surfaces on both sides of a door shall not vary by more than
13mm. The elevation shall be maintained on both sides of the doorway for a distance of
at least equal to width of the widest leaf. Thresholds at doorways shall not be more than
13mm in height.

V.
f/&~.
All stairs, landings, sidewalks, platforms and open elevated places with more than two (2)
steps (300mm) shall be provided with hand railings with zinc yellow paint. Stairs and
All handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Approved nosing shall be provided
BY:

DATI:: II 2011-06-06
to all stair treads.

Ramps of not more than 12.5% slope shall be provided in front of all double doors.
Handrails along ramps shall be removable.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

W. Floor finishes and yard surfacing shall be as per TES-P-119.19. Loading/unloading
TO BE USED
CONSTRUCTION
FOR platforms in front of double leaf doors shall be provided with UV resistant (exposed type)
OR
FOR ORDERING solvent free polyurethane or acrylic polymer modified cementitious material.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
X. Battery room shall be provided with acid/caustic resistant floor and wall tiles up to roof
ceiling. Acid neutralizing dry pit shall be provided outside the building to collect the
acid/caustic from the battery room. The finished floor level of the battery room shall be
50mm lower than the finished floor level of the switchgear and control building.
[ROLl

Y. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communication room,

record room/office, AC/DC Room, Relay Test Room, corridor, workshop, and toilet. The
false ceiling requirement shall be as per TES-P-119.19.

Z. Raised access floor at the communication room shall be provided as per the requirements

I ofTES-P-119.19.

Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

sufficient space for routing cable to the associated equipment, but shall not be less than
900mm.

A1. The exterior of the buildings shall be painted with textured emulsion paint on tooled finish.
The interior of the switchgear and control building shall be plastered and painted with flat
REVISIONS enamel semi-gloss paint. The ceiling shall be painted with textured matt enamel paint.
The firewalls shall be painted with textured emulsion paint. Cable entry room walls and
PREPARED BY; --'=---1
ROL ceiling shall be painted. Cable entry room floor shall be coated with epoxy floor dust
DATE: proofer and hardener.
CHK'DBY:

81. Siabs-on-grade shall be TCS-Q-113.03. The minimum thickness of slab shall be 150mm
reinforced with the required reinforcement.

C1. Room identification plates and safety signboards for switchgear & control bUilding fire
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO rated doors (indoor and outdoor locations) shall be installed on walls beside the doors by
screws. The plates/signboards shall be of aluminum with durable baked enamel
201,...... background. Message shall be screen-printed with UV resistant ink.

Safety signs on doors shall be installed as per the requirements of COMPANY Safety
Signs and Warning Devices Special Manual NO. 65-110.
OI"EJtATlNGDEPARTMENT

The color shade for room identification letters shall be Traffic Black (RAL 9017). English
Letter style shall be Helvetica and shall be uppercase only.

01. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel unistrut supports, clamps, etc., for
r<RTnmm,c / routing outgoing feeder cables.

~,:!:ir:ll
BY:
E1. Design, fabricate and install hot-dip galvanized steel bridges over the cables. The steel
bridges shall be covered with hot-dip galvanized steel grating.
DATE: -==----1

2.11 COOLING TOWERS

A. Where required, cooling tower concrete foundations and their supporting frameworks
TIDS DRAWING lS NOT
TO BE USED FOR (reinforced concrete or galvanized steel) shall be designed and installed per the
CONSlRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERlNG recommendations of the manufacturer.
MATEIlIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
B. All the required concrete foundations for pumps, motors, valves and tanks, etc., shall be
designed and installed.

[ROLl

C. All ducts, piping and components shall be suitably designed and supported by hot-dip
galvanized steel support structures. Design and installation of their foundations.

D. Design and installation of hot-dip galvanized steel structures and their concrete
foundations for heat exchanger.

2.12 CABLE TUNNELS

A. Contractor shall design and construct cable tunnels as shown in the Substation Layout.
Five (5) meters width of tunnel shall be considered from the edge of the column is
projected inside the tunnel

B. CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of the cable tunnels and shall size them
REVISIONS adequately, taking into consideration the follOWing aspects: space for maintenance and
operations, all future piping to be installed and all the cables installation in this PROJECT
plus 20% spare capacity. However, minimum width of cable tunnels shall be 5 meters.
CONTRACTOR shall provide all the metallic cable trays, galvanized steel supports for the
cables and necessary accessories

C. Cable tunnels under or adjacent to the GIS buildings shall meet all the requirements of
TES-P-119.19. Emergency exits shall be per TES-P-119.19. Cable tunnel waterproofing
shall be per TES-P-119.19. A minimum of two (2) emergency exits from the cable tunnels
aJi,1
CD"RIANO s.MAURlClO shall be provided. Fire rated doors and reinforced concrete staircases with pipe railings
shall be provided at the emergency exits to allow exit from the cable tunnel or entrance to
101...... cable tunnel from the substation yard.

The floor slab of the cable tunnel shall be sloped towards the drainage sump pit at 0.5%
OPERATINGDEPARTMENT
slope with the use of cement screed. A minimum of two (2) sump pits shall be provided.
The size of the sump pits shall be 900 x 900 x 750mm.

D. Cable tunnels shall be properly ventilated.

2.13 ROAD MARKING AND PARKING AREAS

Contractor shall develop and propose the required road marking inside the substation
DATE; 201~
based on traffic movement requirements.

Car park (with marking and precast concrete stoppers) areas shall be developed inside
the substation.

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT The road marking and car park shall be painted with reflectorized yellow paint. The
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR centerline of the roads shall be painted with reflectorized white broken lines.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UN'J'D.,
CERTIFIED AND DATED

2.14 GATEHOUSE AND TOILET

A. Gatehouse shall be constructed as per the requirements of COMPANY Standard

Drawings TA-800039, TA-800040, TA-800041 and TA-800042. The location of the
[ROLl

gate house shall be near the main drive gate. However, the final location of gatehouse
shall be decided during the definitive design stage.

Gatehouse shall comply with the requirements of HCIS-SEC-03, HCIS-SEC-04 and HCIS-
SEC-05.

I B. Toilet shall be provided near the gate house. Toilet shall be a separate reinforced concrete
room with concrete hollow block masonry walls 200mm thick. Toilet shall meet all the
requirements of TES-P-119 except it shall have one (1) westem water closet, and one (1)
washbasin.

2.15 GROUNDING OF REBARS AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC

REVISIONS The rebars of the switchgear & control buildings and outdoor equipment foundations shall
be connected to the main grounding grid of the substation. The grade slab of the
PREPARED BY: RQL switchgear & control buildings shall also be connected to the main grounding grid at every
DATE:
5 meters in both directions.
CBK'DBY:
The grounding conductor shall be connected to rebars by exothermic welded joints and
the welded joints shall be painted with two (2) coats of coal tar epoxy & mastic taped.

The minimum size of conductor for connection to rebars shall be as per TES-P-119.
Cd!
CIPRIANO S. MAURIOO
Sufficient number of pigtails shall be left at appropriate locations for grounding connection
to the foundations, grade slab and structures, etc. The pigtails are then readily available
after backfilling for the above grade connection.
'01~

2.16 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES

01'EKATINGDEPAltTMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall design, fabricate and erect all equipment support structures such as
bus insulators, surge arresters, cable-sealing ends, disconnect switches, etc., as detailed
in the COMPANY Standard DraWings TA-800001 and TA-800102. These drawings shall
be used for general arrangement, concept and gUidance only. The sizes of members shall
j not be less than those given in these drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide the design
calculations for COMPANY review and approval.

B. Fabricate and install switch operating platforms for disconnect switches as detailed in
COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800002.

C. Anchor bolts for fixing outdoor equipment structures to their reinforced concrete
foundations shall be Type-3 as detailed in Standard Drawing SC-036128. Other types of
anchor bolts may be used depending upon the requirements and acceptance of the
nos DRAWING IS NOT COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTll.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.17 LATTICED STEEL GANTRYfTAKE-CFF STRUCTURES

Latticed steel gantry/take-off structures shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-

119.09, Rev. 01. All latticed steel gantry/take-off structures shall be designed and detailed
such that they can be extended on both sides.
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 24
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

2.18 CAST-IN-PLACE AND PRECAST CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS

Cast-in-place concrete shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.03.

Precast concrete shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.04.

2.19 CONCRETE COVER

Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as per the recommendations of TCS-Q-113.03.

REVISIONS
2.20 CONCRETE CABLE TRENCHES

rREPARmBY: - - -ROL
''''''-;
A Inside the BUildings
DATE:
Design and construct separate reinforced concrete trenches covered with removable steel
CRK'DBY:
checkered plates to route power cables and mechanical pipes inside the buildings. The
inner edges of the trench walls shall be provided with steel angles.

The checkered plates shall be property supported with steel supporting framework. The
size of each checkered plate shall be limited to 0.6 square meters. Each checkered plate
cui
CIPIUANO S. MAURIOO shall be provided with two elliptical openings for lifting purposes and adequate number of
lifting bars shall be supplied. The steel plates shall be properly stiffened with steel flats at
2........ their bottom. All steel shall be hot-dip galvanized.

Bottom slab of the trenches shall be sloped towards a sump pit; sufficient number of
On:RATINGDEPAIl1'MENT sump pits shall be provided at suitable locations.

Access to trenches shall be through climbing rungs. Climbing rungs shall be galvanized
steel coated with polyethylene red in color on 300mm spacing. The diameter of the rod
shall be 25mm; the wall distance shall be 180mm and bore distance shall be 330mm.

Trenches shall be made water-tight by providing two (2) layers of elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick) on sides and bottom exposed to
soil. The membrane shall be protected with cement screed and protection board.

B. Outside the buildings

Design and construct reinforced concrete trenches with removable precast concrete
covers outside the substation buildings to route power cables and mechanical pipes.
nos DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR The precast concrete covers shall be provided with lifting arrangement acceptable to the
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. The design of trenches and trench covers shall be such
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDAND DATED
that entry of surface water shall be minimized. The inner edges of the trenches shall be
protected with galvanized steel angles.

Bottom slab of these trenches shall be sloped towards a sump pit. Sufficient number of
sump pits shall be provided at suitable locations.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 25
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

The top of trenches shall be kept 100mm higher than the surrounding asphalt level to

I
prevent the entry of surface storm water, dust, debris and sand.

The trenches inside the substation yard shall be of traffic type, i.e., these trenches shall
be designed for heaviest anticipated vehicle load.

PREPARED BY: _==--1

ROL 2.21 CONCRETE PROTECTION
DATE;
Concrete surfaces, except grade slab, shall be coated in accordance with the following:
CHK'DBY:

A. Concrete surfaces in contact with soil

Concrete shall be coated with coal tar epoxy after thirty-five (35) days of concrete
placement. Minimum number of coats shall be two (2) or the dry film thickness shall
CIPRIANO SoMAURlCIO
not be less than 600 microns, whichever produces higher thickness.

B. Concrete surfaces above grade

20'.......
After a minimum of thirty-five (35) days of concrete placement for severe exposure
concrete, all exposed concrete surfaces (above grade) shall be coated with an
OPERAnNG DEPARTMENT elastomeric polyurethane waterproofing material. The coating application shall
extend continuously 300mm below grade after curing of first coat of coal tar epoxy
coating. The minimum dry film thickness of elastomeric polyurethane coating shall
be 1mm. The interface of concrete and steel shall also be coated and the coating
shall extend 300mm above the interface point over the steel members. The primer
shall be suitably selected for concrete and steel surfaces.

C. Concrete interior surfaces

All interior surfaces (walls and base slab) of concrete (manholes, handholes,
trenches and cable basements/cable entry rooms) shall be coated with two (2) coats
of elastomeric cementitious impermeable membrane after thirty-five (35) days of
concrete placement. The total wet film thickness shall not be less than 1mm.

For cable tunnels, all interior surfaces shall be coated as per Clause 2.21.C above.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCllON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATIJUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.22 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE COATING REQUIREMENTS AND APPLICATION

A. General

Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed in all aspects of surface

preparation, priming, coating application (first and succeeding coats and intervals therein,
(ROLl

etc.), and curing time and safety practices. The coating on the exterior concrete surfaces
shall be carried out after a minimum of fourteen (14) days following the curing period.

The coating shall form and maintain a continuous film over the concrete. The coating
material shall penetrate into the concrete and adhere to it effectively. This is to afford
protection to the concrete against the entry of oxygen, moisture and aggressive ions.

The recommended procedure for protective coating application is outlined in the

subsequent sub-sections.

B. Surface Preparation

The surface to be coated shall be prepared prior to the application of the coating material.

REVISIONS If any, surface cracks, shallow spalls and holes on the concrete surface shall be filled with
a concrete surfacer.
FRUARID BY: ROL

DATE: These regions shall be repaired in a manner prescribed below:

CHK'DBY;

1. Where cracks are present, cut "V' grooves using chisel or a similar tool.
2. Presoak with potable water the region for at least eight (8) hours before filling the
cracks.
3. Fill the cracks with the specified concrete surfacer.
CIPRIANOS. MAURICIO 4. Cure with potable water the repaired region continuously for time period as
recommended by manufacturer, but in any case not less than seven (7) days.

Dirt and other loose materials, laitance, oil, grease, wax, black-white carbonate deposits
and yellow-white sulfate deposits shall be removed from the surface to reach solid gray
OI'fJlATING DEPARTMENT
concrete underneath.

The concrete surface shall be scrubbed by steel bristled brushes, followed by blowing of
compressed air (free of oil). Alternatively, a brush-off blast procedure may be adopted (the
sandblasting gun is held at a distance from the surface and the surface is swept with the

,,-@,'
blast stream). The compressed air shall be free of oil and water as visually indicated by a
collector (absorbent or non-absorbent), following the standard test procedure ASTM
04285. Further, ASTM standard practices for surface cleaning and abrading of concrete
BY:
M BAM ...
surface prior to coating application clean the neWly exposed roughened concrete surface
DATE; 2011-06-06 by water blasting, using potable water. If corrosion products are observed on the metallic
structure and/or associated hardware immediately above the concrete, sandblast and
clean 300mm length above the concrete. This shall be done by abrasive blasting,
employing 60-80 meshes sand or mineral grit to a "white metal blast" finish as described
in Section 6.2.7 of TES-H-107.01. Care shall be taken to ensure avoidance of any
1HIS DRAWING IS NOT damage of the thread of the bolts. At the time of application of coating material, the
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR surface shall be clean, dry and shall have adequate roughness for effective bonding of the
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
costing material to the prepared substrate.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

Manufacturer's recommendation shall be strictly followed in all aspects of surface

preparation, priming as applicable to concrete and steel substrates, coating application
(first and succeeding coats and intervals therein, etc.), curing time and safety practices.

[ROLl

The coating work shall be carried out after a minimum of 14 days following the completion
of curing period. The coating shall form and maintain a continuous film over the concrete
surface and over the steel-concrete interface. The coating material shall penetrate into
the concrete and adhere to it effectively.

C. Coating

1. General

a. Coating material application shall be carried out according to the

manufacturer's recommendations. In case of any conflict between this
specification and the manufacturer's recommendations, the conflict shall be
resolved by a meeting of the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and the
manufacturer's REPRESENTATIVE prior to any application.
REVISIONS

b. Coating materials, which have gelled or otherwise deteriorated during storage,

PREPARED BY: ---===---I
ROL
shall not be used. However, thixotropic materials, which may be stirred to
DATE: obtain normal consistency, shall be acceptable.
CHK'DBY:

Coating materials containing heavy or metallic pigments that have a tendency

to settle must be kept in suspension in the pressure pot by a mechanical
stirrer.

011/
CIPRIANO So MAURIOO
c. Only thinners as specified by the manufacturer shall be used. Mixing and
thinning directions as fumished by the manufacturer shall be followed.
10........
If a coating material requires the addition of a catalyst, the pot life under
application conditions shall be clearly stated on the label. The pot life must not
be exceeded. When the pot life limit is reached, the spray pot must be
OPERATING DEf'AllTMIXT
emptied, the material discarded, the equipment cleaned and new material
catalyzed.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and at least for the specified time
(as recommended by the manufacturer) prior to the application of a succeeding
(follow-on) coat.
(/
BY;

DATE:
!9l.
M~"'··
1Ot2.-0i-06
AR
No coating application shall be done during a sandstorm and on windy and
rainy days. In case of an unanticipated occurrence of any of the above
conditions, the wet coat shall be protected (covered) property. The completed
(cured) coating shall be free from defects such as runs, sags, pinholes, voids,
bubbles or other "Holidays".

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

2. Coating Application
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING a. Priming
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
- The prepared surfaces shall be coated with the primer specified, within the
time limits as may be specified by the manufacturer, and prior to sunset of that
day.

[ROLl

The prepared, dried concrete surfaces shall be primed with a highly

penetrating priming coat. The primer shall be applied by brush and shall be
applied rather heavily for penetration. However, any excess shall be removed
from the surface so that no heavy areas or puddles are formed.

Regions of metallic members and hardware cleaned of any corrosion products,

as mentioned in "surface preparation" above shall be coated With sacrificial
specified zinc primer. This shall be done immediately after cleaning. After
curing of the sacrificial zinc primer, apply the elastomeric coating material.

The priming coat shall be applied on the steel surfaces and the steel concrete
interface such that there are no air or water pockets. Care shall be taken to
ensure proper coating at sharp comers, edges, bolts, hidden recesses and
inaccessible areas.
REVISIONS
b. Coating WORK
PREPAREDBY: ROL

DATE:
Coating materials shall be either spray-applied or brush-applied.
CHK'DBY:
3. Spray Application

Lines and pots shall be thoroughly cleaned before the addition of new materials. The
spray gun shall always be held at right angles to the surface and shall be held no
w
CIPRIANO SoMAURICIO
closer than 450mm nor more than 600mm from the surface for the airless spray gun
method, or no closer than 150mm or more than 250mm from the surface for air
spray equipment. Even, parallel passes shall be made with the spray gun. In
application of material, each spray shall overlap the previous pass by 50%. Large
surfaces shall always receive passes in two directions at right angles to each other.
Spray width adjustment on the gun shall be made and the readjustment of atomizing
OPERATING DEPARTMENT pressure at the regulators shall be made until the desired spray pattern is obtained.

Each coat is to be applied uniformly and completely over the entire surface. All runs
and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be removed and the
surface re-sprayed.

Before spraying each coat, all areas such as corners, edges and interstices shall be
precoated by brush to ensure that these areas have at least the minimum specified
film thickness.
DATE: 2012-06-416

Spray application from a single position will not be permitted.

A supply of tips with varying spray angles and washers, as recommended by the
supplier for each specific configuration to be coated, shall be available at site.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR 4. Brush Application
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
The coating material shall be brushed on to all areas, which cannot be properly
spray coated for any reason. Surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be coated by
other suitable means to ensure a uniform film of adequate thickness.

(ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX OOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 29
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

Brushes used in coating application shall be of a style and quality that will permit
proper application. Round or oval brushes generally are considered most suitable for
rivets, bolts, and irregular surfaces. Wide flat brushes are suitable for large flat
areas, but they shall not have a width of over 120mm. No extending handles shall be
allowed on brushes.

I The brushing shall be done such that a smooth coat, as nearly uniform in thickness
as possible, is obtained. There shall be no deep or detrimental brush marks. The
coating material shall be worked into all crevices and comers.

Runs or sags shall be brushed out.

In brush application of any of the solvent-type coatings, care must be taken so that
no lifting of former coats occurs.
REVISIONS

During application of each coat, all areas such as corners, edges and interstices
PREPAREDBY: ROL
---'==---1
shall receive additional coating material to ensure that these areas have at least the
DATE: minimum specified film thickness and to ensure continuity of the coating.
CBK'DBY:

5. Film Thickness and Testing:

The total dry film thickness (OFT) that shall be obtained upon application and
SUbsequent curing shall be:
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO

a. Above Grade Application: 1mm for polyurethane material

b. Below Grade Application: O.60mm for coal tar epoxy

OPl.RAnNG DEPARTMENT c. Concrete Interior Surfaces: 1mm (wet film thickness) for cementitious
elastomeric material

The coating dry film thickness limit must be adhered to strictly; the film thickness
shall be checked with the calibrated film thickness gauge supplied by the
CONTRACTOR. Where the film thickness does not meet this specification,
additional coating material shall be applied.

In order to achieve the specified dry film thickness, frequent checks on wet film
DATE; 2tlU·(l6.06 thickness shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR.

In case of concrete surfaces, coupons of the dried film shall be cut out from the
coated surface, at locations where lesser film thickness is suspected. The cut out
region shall be re-coated, as specified herein.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CQNSTRUcnON OR A dry film, magnetic type thickness gauge (for steel surfaces) shall be calibrated
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTU.. and made available at the site.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

D. Repair of Defects

1. General
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 30
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

Before application of any further coat of material, all damages to previous coats shall
be repaired.

2. Inadequate Coating Thickness

Areas with inadequate coating thickness shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if

necessary, abraded, and additional compatible coats applied until they meet this
specification. These additional coats shall blend in with the final coating on adjoining
areas.

3. Coating Damage not exposing the Substrate

Surfaces to be over coated, which become contaminated or damaged, shall be

cleaned by lightly brush-blasting (sweep-blasting) the surface free of all
REVISIONS
contamination prior to applying the following coats. After brush blasting, any residual
contaminants shall be removed by dry compressed air or wiped by hand with clean,
rREPAREDBY: _=
ROL- /
dry rags. The coating around the damaged area shall be chamfered, using an
DATE: approved method, to ensure continuity of the patch coat. The full coating system
CHK'DBY: shall then be reapplied strictly in accordance with this specification.

4. Coating Damage Exposing the Substrate

The damaged area shall be re-cleaned as originally specified for that item and the
~URJCIO full coating system reapplied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The re-cleaning shall carry over on to the secure surrounding
201""" coating (properly adhering to the substrate) for not less than 25mm all around and
the edges shall be duly chamfered.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT E. Inspection

1. The COMPANY shall have the right to inspect at all times any tools, interments,
materials or equipment used in the performance of the coating application. The
CONTRACTOR shall make all parts of the WORK accessible for these inspections.

The COMPANY will designate a REPRESENTATIVE who will act for the COMPANY
to:
BY;

DAn: _=::;:;:""---1 a. Observe all application procedures during the time the WORK is in progress.

b. Approve the surface preparation prior to the application of any coating.

c. Approve condition of each coat prior to the application of the following coat.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR. Film contlnulty verification on concrete substrate may be done by followinq the
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
standard practice ASTM D4787, utiliZing high voltage start testing. Film
CERTIFIED AND DATED continuity over the steel concrete interfaces shall be following mentioned.

2. The COMPANY shall have the right to reject any and all tools, instruments,
materials, equipment or WORK, which do not conform to the specifications.
[ROLl

~
~
Rejected areas of coating application shall be marked (for indication only) with a
1J compatible paint of contrasting color.

3. Any rejected coating applications, defective preparatory WORK or any defective

WORK not conforming to this specification shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR
z
0
at no additional cost to the COMPANY. Any rejected tools, instruments, materials or

~
equipment shall be replaced or rectified at no additional cost to the COMPANY.
~

"'" 4. After completion of the WORK, all surplus materials and wastes from the coating
WORK shall be collected and disposed-off outside the working area. Overruns,
droppings and smears shall be removed.

0
z ~ N
- 2.23 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
REVISIONS

I'REf'ARED BY: ROL A. The crown of substation asphalt yard shall be at the center of the substation plot. The
yard shall be graded to drain water towards the fence (or boundary wall) at slope of 0.5
DATE:

CHK'D BY;
",
~
...... percent.
L/',."
B. For the finished grade (crown) of the substation/SSP site development, refer to Clause
.lll!Il!m! 7.4, TES-P-119.19.

(JJLI C. Asphalt concrete paving works shall be as per the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.
CIPRIANO S. M/lIJRICIO
Minimum thickness of combined binder and wearing course shall be 102mm (64mm thick
class "A" asphalt binder course and 38mm thick Class "C" asphalt wearing course).
"'1-416-06
D. Base and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirement of TCS-Q-113.01 and TCS-Q-
113.02. Minimum thickness of base course shall be 300mm, Class "B" as per TCS-Q-
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
113.02 with liquid limit of 25% and Plasticity Index of 4-8% maximum. Sub-base materials
shall conform to TCS-Q-113.02.

E. Asphalt paving shall be designed for the following vehicle (mobile substation) loading.

~:/ Truck width

Description
3400mm
Vehicle Type (Mobile Substation)

'Y.1f..7Ii
By:M-r 7 All
Axle Soacinq 1500mm
DATE: 101:z.<l6..e6
Axle load 20000 kq
King Pin Load 25000 kg
Pay load + Dead Weiqht (81500 + 22500) kg
Total Weiqht 104000 kq

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRucnON OR 2.24 SEPTIC TANKS AND SEEPAGE PITS
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Septic tank, seepage pit and distribution box shall be as per COMPANY Standard
Drawings TA-800134, TA-800135 and TA-800136, except as modified herein:

a. Concrete shall conform to severe exposure condition.

[ROL]
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 32
T448 A PTS·11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY .

b. CONTRACTOR shall determine by structural calculations if the septic tank and

seepage are directly located under traffic load. If necessary, the CONTRACTOR
shall redesign/reinforce the septic tank and seepage pit.

c. Septic tank interior surfaces shall be coated two (2) coats of elastomeric
cementitious impermeable membrane after thirty-five (35) days of concrete

I d.
placement. The total wet film thickness shall not be less than 1mm.

Septic tanks shall be made watertight by providing two (2) layers of elastomeric
bituminous waterproofing membrane (each minimum of 4mm thick) on sides and
bottom exposed to soil. The membrane shall be protected with cement screed and
protection board.

REVISIONS 2.25 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES AND COVERS

PREPAREDBY: ROL
Sanitary sewer manholes and covers shall be as per COMPANY Standard Drawings TA-
DATE: 2Dl~ 800137.
CBK'DBY:

2.26 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURESITAKE-OFF

STRUCTURES
CIL(/ Concrete foundations shall be provided to support all the necessary equipment and steel
CIPRIANO S. MAURlCKJ

structures. Top of concrete foundations for equipment and other support structures shall
'01"- be of the same elevation, with the top of concrete at 150mm (minimum) to 450mm
(maximum) from top of asphalt.

OPERAnNGDUAkTMENT
Design criteria for the design of foundations shall be in accordance with TES-P-119.19
and TES-P-119.18.

2.27 POWER TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS

The foundations for power transformers shall be designed as per TES-P-119.18 and TES-
P-119.21. Oil catch basin or oil retention pit shall be designed in the form of an open
rectangular reinforced concrete box with transformer placed on concrete block foundation.
The oil catch basin shall be designed to hold 100% of transformer oil. Interconnection
pipes shall be provided to keep the depth to a minimum. In addition, the follOWing
requirements shall be implemented.

Design and install galvanized steel grating and structural steel supports 300mm below the
mIS DRAWING IS NOT top of the foundation and spread gravel with size between 20 to 30mm over it to permit
TO BE usrn FOR
CONSTRUCl1ON OR transformer oil to readily flow into the oil catch basin. The gravel shall be clean, non-
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
dusting, hard and shall conform to 70-TMSS-03, Rev. 01 (except the grading
CERTIFIED AND DATED requirements). The galvanized steel grating shall be adequately grounded and bonded to
the substation grounding system. The floor slab of the catch basin shall be sloped towards
a sump pit. Galvanized steel checkered plates shall be provided over the sump pit.

[ROLl

A permanent manually operated horizontal mounted centrifugal pump shall be installed

near the transformer foundation on a concrete pad. It shall be protected with a galvanized
steel sunshade.

Top of transformer foundations & oil catch basins shall be kept as follows:

a. Shall be in level with other equipment foundations (approximately 300mm above the
surrounding asphalt level) if rails are to be provided up to the road fronting the
transformers

b. Flushed on the asphalt if longitudinal rails are also provided along the road fronting the
transformers, in which case, the road shall be level for a length equal to the length of
the longitudinal rails

REVISIONS
Galvanized steel grating shall be a minimum of 5mm thick with a clear spacing of 19mm.
Gratings and structural steel supports shall be galvanized as per ASTM A123, except that
ROL
J'RIiJ'AREDBY: --:::::::.-.--/
the minimum thickness of galvanizing shall be O.13mm. Galvanized steel wire mesh shall
be provided above the metal grating.
CHK'DBY;

The oil catch basin shall be made watertight by providing elastomeric bituminous
waterproofing membrane two (2) layers, each 4mm thick on sides and bottom. The
waterproofing membranes shall be protected with protection board and cement concrete
screed.
CIPRIANOS. MAUlUCIO

Crash barriers with chain link shall be installed around power transformers as per the
Standard Drawing TA-800133.

OPERATING DEI"ARTMIJ'IT 2.28 FIREWALLS

Design and install reinforced concrete firewalls at locations shown on the conceptual
drawings. Minimum thickness of firewalls shall be 200mm for above ground and 300mm
for below ground. Firewalls shall be constructed independent from the buildings and
separated by isolation joints.
7T.7I.J
BY:
b..Z.L1 The clearance of a firewall from a transformer shall be as per TES-P-119.21. Fire
resistance rating of firewalls shall be 3 hours. Firewall faces shall be painted with texture
DATE: 2OlZ-<l6-Ofl emulsion paint. Painting shall be as specified in TES-H-107.01 and TES-H-107.02.

2.29 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS

TH1S DRAWING IS NOT The foundations of transformers shall be designed as per TES-P-119.18 and TES-P-
TO BE USED IDR
CONSTRUCTION OR 119.21.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Crash barriers with chain link shall be installed around station service transformers as per
Standard Drawing TA-800133.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3BOJ115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 34
T448 A PT8-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

2.30 COMMUNICATION DUCTBANKS AND HANDHOLES

CONTRACTOR shall construct all necessary dedicated communication concrete encased

ductbanks (for underground non-metallic fiber optic cables and communication entrance
telephone cables from STC) and handholes. The CONTRACTOR shall determine the
exact routing of the ductbanks.

Ductbanks and handholes system shall be provided from take-off structure up to the
communication room. Communication handhole near to the take-off structure shall be
within 5 meter radius.

Handholes shall conform to the COMPANY Standard Drawings TB-800076 and TB-
800077.
REVISIONS
Communication handholes shall be provided at every change in direction, crossing, start
and end of ductbank system and at every 300 meters of continuous cable run.
Communication handhole nearest to the building shall be within 5 meters from the building
DATE: 201,"""", wall.
CHK'DBY: -..:1&.
(Y...~./
Communication ductbanks shall consist of 2 x 110mm 0 PVC conduits encased in
concrete in accordance with Standard Drawing TB-800079. One of the conduits shall be
provided with 4 x 32mm HDPE sub ducts. Spare conduits and sub ducts shall be provided
(JJI/ with different colored nylon pull ropes and shall be plugged for future use.
CIPRIANOSoMAURICIO

Two (2)-50mm 0 PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits shall be provided and
installed to route the Underground Non-Metallic Optical Fiber Cables from the Joint Box
on the take-off structures to the Communication Handhole located at the base of the
structure.
OPEllA11NG DEPARTMI:NT

Two (2)-50mm 0 PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduits shall be provided from the
handhole near the building to the point of cable entry into the buildinq to route the fiber
optic cables.

Additionally, a ductbank with one (1) 50mm diameter PVC conduit shall be provided
between communications telephone termination cabinet (TTC) and the boundary wall for
the future STC Telephone connection.

DATE: 2012-06-86 Sides and base slab of handholes shall be provided with two (2) layers of waterproofing
membrane (each minimum 4mm thick). The membrane applied to vertical surfaces shall
be protected with a 15mm thick protection board, and applied to horizontal surfaces shall
be with 50mm thick concrete screed and two (2) layers of 150-micron polyethylene sheet.

TIllS ORAWING IS xor The elevation of the top of the communication handholes shall be 100mm above the
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR surrounding asphalt finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All handholes
FOR
MATERIAlS
ORDERING
UNTIL
within the substation yard shall be of traffic type.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

Communication handhole accessories shall be in accordance with Standard Drawing TA-

800098.

[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380J115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 35
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

A stainless steel marker plate with the following information shall be provided on each
fiber optic cable handhole. Marker plate shall be as per Standard Drawing TB-800076.

The marker plate shall be located on the hand hole cover collar frame.

SEC FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

CONTRACT NO.
HANDHOLE NO.lSTRUCTURE NO.
JOINT BOX NO.
CABLE TYPE/NO. OF CORES
LINK DESTINATION
oz CABLE MANUFACTURER
INSTALLATION YEAR
REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: ROL

2.31 ELECTRICAL DUCTBANKS AND MANHOLES
DATE:

CUK'DBY: CONTRACTOR shall determine the exact layout of power and control cable ductbanks
and shall size them adequately to accommodate all the LV & power cables to be installed
in this PROJECT including future expansion plus 20% spare capacity.

Ductbanks shall meet the requirements of Standard Drawing TA-800062. Manholes shall
(fA! be in accordance with TA-800096, TA-800097 and TA-800098. Manholes shall be of
ClI'lUANO S. MAURIOO
traffic type.
2012-06-86
Manholes shall be sized to accommodate all the electrical cables and shall provide
necessary room for the maintenance, bending and splicing of cables
OPERA11NGDEI'ARTMENT
Manholes shall be provided with pulling eyes, sump, ladder rungs and all necessary
accessories. Manhole covers shall be of cast iron, coated with anti-corrosion paint. Spare
ducts shall be capped and water sealed.

Manholes shall be provided at every change in direction, crossing, start and end of
ductbank system and at every 300 meters of continuous cable run.

Sides and base slab of manholes shall be provided with two (2) layers waterproofing
BY: , membrane (each minimum 4mm thick). The membrane applied to vertical surfaces shall
DATE, _==--; be protected with a 15mm thick protection board, and applied to horizontal surfaces shall
be with 50mm thick concrete screed and two (2) layers of 150-micron polyethylene sheet.

The elevation of the top of manholes shall be 100mm above the surrounding asphalt
finished grade elevation to preclude the entry of water. All manholes within the substation
nus DRAWING ]S NOT
yard shall be of traffic type. The manholes shall not be located in asphalt road or road
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
ORDERING
marking.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
A stainless steel marker plate with writing "SEC ELECTRICAL MANHOLE NUMBER #"
shall be provided on each manhole. The marker plate shall be located on the manhole
cover collar frame.

[ROLl

2.32 SUBSTATION SIGNBOARD

A. Substation building signboard shall be installed as per Standard Drawing TC-800003.

B. Substation signboard shall be installed near the gatehouse facing the access road.
Substation signboard near the gatehouse shall be per Standard Drawing TA-800111.

I 2.33 PERIMETER FENCE & GATES/PRECAST BOUNDARY WALLS

A. Perimeter fence shall be as per COMPANY Standard Drawing TA-800113, TES-S-101.02,

SEC Construction Standard TCS-M-112.01 and 70-TMSS-02.

REVISIONS
Perimeter fence shall comply with the requirements of HCIS-SEC-02.

PREPAREDBY; ---=""'-,
ROL B. Pedestrian and vehicular gates Main drive gate and personnel gate shall be as per
Standard Drawing SA-036272 except the height shall be 3000mm instead of 2400mm.
DAlE: ,","""",,'
~-'al! There shall be helical barbed wires with tension wires (3 strands) behind the gate similar
CHK'D BY:
(J_-).. p to the precast boundary wall. A suitable opening shall be provided in the drive and
personnel gate at padlock location so that the lock can be opened/closed from both sides
of the gate, details of which shall be furnished to the COMPANY for review and approval.

()J/ C. The asphalt level near the gates shall be maintained at the same elevation (preferably
CIPRJANO SoMAVlUCIO
flat) for a distance of at least equal to the width of the gate leaf to facilitate opening of
gates and maintaining 50mm gap between the asphalt and the gates.
'01.......

D. The gate locking system indicated in the drawing may be changed depending upon the
requirements of the COMPANY. Similarly, the gate holder arrangement may also be
OJ'ERATING DD'AItIMENT
changed depending upon the requirements of the COMPANY.

Gate locking system shall comply with the requirements of HCIS-SEC-10.

E. The drive and personnel gates shall be fabricated and installed to avoid the following:

1. Unbalancing of hinges
2. Barrel bolt shall have movable lid at the top to prevent entry of sand and debris.
3. It shall be made rigid, such that during high wind condition it can be opened or
DATE: 2112-46-06
closed easily and safely.

F. Precast concrete boundary walls including pedestrian and vehicular gates, if shown in the
conceptual drawings, shall be constructed as per Standard Drawing TA-800012.
Contractor shall submit boundary wall layout and shop drawings for review and approval
TlDS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR before fabrication of precast columns and walls.
CONSTRUCflON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATDUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.34 PROTECTIVE CRASH BARRIERS WITH CHAIN LINK

Install crash barriers with chain links around the following:

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP APPENDIX·V1l1b 37
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii 1'!.:a.)fSll '-:,)~ a..sySJ\
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~
~
= a. Power Transformers
~ b. Station Service Transformers
c. PACUs except when they are installed on the roof

Protective crash barriers shall be installed as per Standard Drawing TA-800133.

"
Q
A heavy-duty galvanized chain link shall be provided between the barriers, provision shall
be made at the barrier to secure the chain link properly.

2.35 ACCESS LADDER TO ROOF

.,;
z; ~ N
- The caged ladder to roof of the buildings shall be as per Standard Drawing SE-1191928.
At the entrance of the ladder, a galvanized steel mesh with locking arrangement shall be
REVISIONS
provided.
PllEPARID BY: ROL

DATE: 201~
2.36 ROOF AND CANOPY WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
CRK'DBY: ~
i:..--~-'

Building roof shall be provided with one (1) layer PVC waterproofing membrane or two (2)
AmIlllll!! layers bituminous waterproofing membranes.

at/
CIPJUANO s. MAURIOO
Roof waterproofing with PVC Membrane

,.. ....".
Item # Description Reauirements/Specifications
1 Concrete roof The concrete surface should be even and smooth. All
sharp projections shall be knocked down and local
depressions and sudden changes shall be filled with
OI'ERATlNG DEPARTMENT
hiah strength mortar to present a true surface.
2 PVC waterproofing Joints shall be welded together using hot air gun.
membrane, 1.5mm,
loose-laid (horizontal)
3 PVC waterproofing UV resistanUstabilized bonded to parapet wall and
~i membrane, 1.5mm thick, terminated at the groove/chase.
Exposed application
~MOft7)AR
fixed with adhesive
(vertical) (Solar shield)
v 4 Adhesive Soecial suitable for hot and humid climate
DATE:
"'1""'" 5 Hot Air Weld The horizontal and vertical membrane shall be
welded (minimum overlap 75mm)
6 Separation layer 200 micron polyethylene sheet
7 Roof Thermal Insulation Rigid extruded polystyrene board
THIS DRAWING IS N(Jf 8 Protection layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester or
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weighing 300g/m 2
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING 9 Gravel 50mm thick
UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 10 Sealant UV resistant
11 Aluminum flashing 50mm x 1mm thick with four bends fixed with screws
12 Cement Mortar Under tiles (25mm thick)
13 Tiles Walkway 800mm wide, loose laid precast concrete
tiles (400mm x 400mm x 4Omm) as per SEC
(ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 38
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
:;i
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1'4..>fSll ~J~ J..s~\
e~
.. Standard Drawing TA-800024.
Ii 14 FilleUCant strip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar strip should
be made along the intersection of horizontal and
vertical surfaces.

z
e Roof waterproofing with 4mm thick elastomeric bituminous membrane

~
'.,"
Item # Description ReqUirements/Specifications
1 Concrete roof The concrete surface should be even and smooth.
All sharp projections shall be knocked down and
local depressions and sudden changes shall be
filled with high strength mortar to present a true
.,;
z ... N ~ surface.
REVISIONS
2 Primer Concrete surfaces shall be dry before application of
Primer. Primer must not be poured onto the surface
PREPARED BY: ROL & care must be taken to avoid "pounding" in
,,,u.:n. depressions.
DATE:
3 Bituminous membrane, The membrane shall be installed using torch
CHK'DBY: "1..Ir"*"
:.;.A-" 4mm thick with 200 gsm welding method and on application fully adhered to
polyester fabric the primed surface for the horizontal and vertical
Am!lll::l'll reinforcement surfaces. The joints shall be welded by torch
welding method.
tu/
Cll"lUANO s.MAUJUQO
4 Bituminous membrane,
4mm thick with 200 gsm
The membrane shall be loose laid over the
membrane described in item 3. The longitudinal and
,,,,..... polyester fabric end lap joints shall be welded by torch welding
reinforcement method.
5 Solar shield Bituminous Granular surface for exposed application
membrane, 4mm thick
Ol'l:RAnNG DEPARTMENT
with 200 gsm polyester
fabric reinforcement
6 Separation layer 200 micron polyethylene sheet
7 Roof Thermal Insulation RiQid extruded polystyrene board
8 Protection Layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester or
~d propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weiQhin{l3001llm2
Gravel
~tftn) 9 50mm thick
By:MO

DATE:
.•."
. --'-7 All

201"""
10
11
Sealant
Aluminum flashing
UV resistant
50mm x 1mm thick with four bends fixed with
screws
12 Cement Mortar Under tiles (25mm thick)
13 Tiles 800mm wide, loose laid walkway made up of
precast concrete tiles (400mm x 400mm x 40mm)
nos DRAWING IS NOT as per SEC Standard Drawing TA-800024.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
14 FilleUCantstrip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar strip
FOR ORDERING should be made along the intersection of horizontal
MATERIALS IlNTIL
CERTIJilED AND DATED and vertical surfaces.

Door canopy waterproofing with one "PVC" or one "4mm thick Bituminous"
membrane

[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 39
T448 A PT5-11 EN367 OF 0
SHEOGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii ,.4.)fSll ~~.,....J\ 4.s..>JJ1
0 SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

~
~ Item # Description Requirements/Specifications
is 1 Concrete canopy
2 Cement sand screed Screed surface should be even and smooth.
3 PVC waterproofing Terminate at the groove/chase. Joints shall be
membrane, 1.5mm thick, hot welded.
s horizontal loose laid and
~ vertical fixed with adhesive
e
~ OR
'e>" Bituminous membrane,
4mm thick with 200gsm Torch welding method. Terminate at the
polyester fabric groove/chase.
reinforcement
0 ~ N ~
4 Adhesive Special suitable for hot and humid climate
z
(applicable for PVC membrane)
REVISIONS
5 Gravel 50mm thick
PIlEI'ARED BY: ROL 6 Protection layer Non-woven, geotextile made from polyester or
propylene fibers, 2mm thick and weighing
DATE: 'OI~ 3OOg/m 2
CHK'DBY: ~
'/;7 7 Sealant UV resistant
8 Fillet/Cant strip 50mm x 50mm sand and cement mortar strip
Am!llm! should be made along the intersection of
horizontal and vertical surfaces.
fA/'
CJPIlIANO s. MAURICIO
The following shall be implemented:

'01""" 1. The roof slope at the gulley/scupper shall be achieved by cement sand screed.
2. Overlapping of PVC membrane shall be 75mm.
3. The built-up roof details other than recommended shall not be approved.
O:n;KATlNG DD'AllTMENT
4. The adhesive for the PVC membrane shall be recommended by the manufacturer.
5. The primer for bituminous membrane shall be recommended by the manufacturer.

2.37 CABLE BASEMENT. CABLE TUNNEL AND CABLE ENTRY ROOM WATERPROOFING

~A--A
n»
;;t.!!.. 7l: Z
MO
"1 AI<
Waterproofing shall be carried out as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.

BY:
The waterproofing membrane shall be extended up to the finished floor level and shall be
DATEl ,..,..... fixed to finished grade slab with aluminum flashing and sealant. In exposed areas, the
membrane shall be type for exposed purpose.

2.38 LIGHTING AND LIGHTNING MAST STEEL MONOPOLES

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
Fabricate and erect lighting and lightning mast steel monopoles as detailed in Standard
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Drawing TA-800004. CONTRACTOR shall select the steel monopoles based on the
approved lighting/lightning calculations and submit the fabrication, assembly & erection
drawings for company review & approval. No fabrication or erection shall start until the
submitted drawings are approved & stamped as Issued For Construction (IFC) & Noted
By.
[ROLl

Design, assembly, fabrication drawings provided by the COMPANY will in no way relieve
the CONTRACTOR from the entire responsibility.

Lighting pole foundations shall not obstruct the service roads.

Lighting poles shall comply with the requirements of HCIS, SEC-04.

2.39 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall install temporary supports to hold the structures and equipment
in place while performing repair WORK. The temporary supports shall be installed only
after the section to be repaired is de-energized.
REVISIONS

B. The temporary supports shall be removed when compressive strength of the grouting
PREPAItED BY: ROL
----'="--I
material and concrete is 28 MPa or more, and in no case, shall the temporary supports be
DATE: removed sooner than seven (7) days after concrete pouring. However, curing shall
CHK'D BY: continue for twenty-one (21) days as outlined in the repair procedure. Placement of
grouting material shall not be done until concrete compressive strength is 21 MPa or
more.

CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO 2.40 CONCRETE REPAIR WORK

'01........ A. Corroded/unsound concrete shall be chipped and removed in order to reach sound
concrete and clean rebar.

OI'EltATING DEPARTMENT B. The chipping shall not be stopped at (or near) the clean rebar. It shall continue to a
minimum of 50mm behind the rebar. The lateral extent of concrete removal shall be
minimum of 300mm beyond the length of the crack or corroded length of the exposed
rebar, whichever is greater.

c. If the cracks still exist, then inject those cracks with epoxy resin.

D. Clean and remove corrosion products from surfaces exposed on concrete removal. The
surface preparation shall be SSPC-SP10 of rebars and SSPC-SP5 of embedded metallic
DATE: 20lZ-lJ6-06 inserts of cable clamps. i.e., to the description in Sections 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 of TES-H-
107.01 respectively, shall be obtained.

E. Tie an extra rebar (not exceeding the original bar in diameter) where any rebar is found to
be corroded by more than 20% of the original cross sectional area, as determined by the
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL F. Coat all cleaned rebar surfaces with a sacrificial zinc-rich primer specified. Prime and coat
CERTIFIED AND DATED
the cleaned. embedded metallic inserts of cable clamps. Wet grit blasting or other
approved means shall be adopted to obtain white metal surface finish (SSPC-SP3 or Sa-3
Surface Preparation of TES-H-1 07.01).

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA. TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 41
T448 A PTS-11 EN387 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

G. Presoak the concrete substrate continuously with potable water, at least eight (8) hours
preceding the placement of concrete/repair mortar. Alternatively, use a bonding agent
according to manufacturer's recommendations and upon COMPANY'S approval.

H. In the chipped (as mentioned above), cleaned and prepared (Le., presoaked) regions,
place concrete and repair mortar. Ensure a minimum clear cover of 75mm to the

I I.
cleaned/added coated rebar. The thickness of the member in the repaired regions shall, if
need be, increased for this purpose.

Cure the repaired regions with potable water continuously for duration of twenty-one (21)
days, since the placement of concrete, and as recommended by the manufacturer, but in
any case, a minimum of seven (7) days, since the repair mortar placed.

J. All repaired/sound concrete surfaces and surface for embedded metallic inserts of cable
REVISIONS
supports shall be prepared and coated for protection.
PJlEPAllFDBY: ROL
K. Temporary supports shall be removed only after the on-site cured concrete cylinder
DATE: specimens have attained a minimum compressive strength, as mentioned above, and in
CHK'DBY: no case, shall it be less than seven (7) days after concrete placement.

2.41 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CRACK INJECTION REPAIR

rJ,(/ A. This method of repair is adopted when concrete cracks are deep and the structural
CIPRIANO SoMAURIOO

integrity of the concrete is to be restored. This procedure of rehabilitation and protection is

1011-006-46 outlined in the following sections.

B. The concrete surface to be repaired by resin injection shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
OI'ERATING DEPARTMfNT
deteriorated concrete and all other loose materials. Those that are to be injected shall
then be thoroughly inspected and injection port, drilling and pumping pattern established.

C. Install injection ports by drilling holes designed to intersect the cracks to depth below the
concrete surface. The spacing of the injection ports shall not exceed 300mm, and closer
spacing of ports may be required. All cracked surfaces shall be sealed so that the liquid
resin injected under pressure will not leak and flow out of cracks prior to gelling and
curinq. A non-sagging surface seal shall be applied to the faces of the cracks completely
bridging the cracks.
DATE: -===---f D. The surface seal adhesive shall be an epoxy resin compatible with the liquid resin being
injected. It shall preferably belong to the product range of the manufacture of epoxy resin
material specification.

E. Care shall be taken to mix only that amount of surface seal that can be utilized before the
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR material begins to gel. Continuous mixing of the two (2) components of the injection
CONSTRUcrrON OR
FOR ORDERING adhesive shall be done in mixing chamber that properly mixes the material into the
MATERlALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
finished curable adhesive. The injection adhesive components shall be separately
pumped into the chamber.

F. The mixed adhesive shall be mechanically injected entering the ports through a
connection fitting appropriate to the type of port fitting attached to the concrete. Injection
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 42
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

pressure shall typically be in the range of 1 MPa to 1.5 MPa and shall allow the entire
crack/fixtures to be filled. The injection pressure shall be sustained until the port no longer
accepts resin. The adhesive shall be injected into the cracks through successive adjacent
ports starting at the lowest port and working upwards. Injection must continue through
one port until the epoxy adhesive starts flowing out of the adjacent port in a steady stream
without air. At this stage, the first port shall be capped off and injection started on the port,

i which has begun to show adhesive.

*" END OF SECTION II **

REVISIONS

PREPAlUWBY; _=--1
IlOL

DATE:

CUK'DBY:

((j/
CII'RIANO S. MAURICIO

2012-06-06

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

DATE: 1012-06-06

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTKUcnON OR
FOR ORDERlNG
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDAND DATED

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVlL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDERNO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 43
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

SECTION 111- MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

3.01 GENERAL

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit two (2) sets of original literature/brochures of the materials,
which shall necessarily include description, composition, uses, advantages, standards
compliance, limitations, precautions, storage, maintenance, installation and application
procedure/method, etc., of the material in detail.

B. Two (2) samples of the proposed material shall be submitted.

C. The materials manufacturer shall provide Certificate of Analysis of his product from the
company approved Independent test agency at the time of approval and shall ready to
perform the random site sampling test at the company approved Independent testing
REVISIONS
agency. The site sampling test reports shall be forwarded to the COMPANY directly by
PllEPAIlFJ>BY: ROL
the Independent testing agency.
DATE;
D. COMPANY has the right to send the proposed sample to an approved independent
CHK'DBY:
testing agency for testing and verification purposes. CONTRACTOR shall bear all the
expenses incurred for testing.

ta/'
CIPRIANO SoMAURICIO
3.02 CONCRETE

A Concrete shall conform to the requirements of 70-TMSS-03, Rev. 01.

,OJ"""'"
B. Type of concrete shall be based on the soil investigation report.

OI'EKATINGDEPAllTMENT C. A lean concrete 75mm thick shall be provided under all concrete cast against the earth.
Lean concrete shall be normal condition; minimum strength shall be 17 MPa. A vapor
barrier, two (2) layers of 150 microns each, polyethylene sheet shall be placed above the
lean concrete.

D. A vapor barrier, two (2) layers of 150 microns each, polyethylene sheet, shall be provided
under electrical and communication concrete encased ductbanks.

DATE:
20'''''''''' 3.03 CEMENT & SAND SCREED

A cement & sand (1:3) screed with water cement ratio as low as possible compatible with
workability. The surface of the structural concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned from all
rubbish, concrete and mortar droppings. Oil and grease patches shall be cleaned with
THIS DRAWING [S NOT
TO BE USED FOR approved agents. The surface of the floor shall be roughened with wire brush and
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDDUNG thoroughly cleaned with clean water. Surplus water shall be brushed off and 1:1
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFJEDAND DATED
cement/sand slurry brushed over the surface immediately before laying the screed. The
finished surface shall be laid in panels and trowelled smooth to produce hard, dense and
flat surface. Continuous curing shall be performed for at least 7 days.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGENO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOS ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 44
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

3.04 REINFORCING STEEL

A Reinforcing steel shall conform to SASO SSA-2/79, hot rolled medium and high tensile
deformed steel with minimum yield strength of 350 MPa and 420 MPa respectively.
Deformations shall conform to ASTM A615M.

B. Reinforcing steel fastening ties shall be made using 1.5mm diameter galvanized wire with
at least two (2) wraps and twists. Tie spacing along the line of any bar shall not exceed
600mm horizontally or vertically. Wire tied splices shall be made with a minimum of two
(2) separate ties.

C. Welded wire fabric shall conform to SASO SSA-224; cold drawn, steel wires with
minimum yield strength of 240 MPa.
REVISIONS
D. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be made by lapping a minimum of one spacing of
ROL
PREPARED BY: ---':::::"-.;
outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet plus 50mm.
DATE:
E. All reinforcement shall be bent cold. Once steel has been bent it shall not be rebent.
CHK'D BY:

F. Welding shall not be permitted unless the mill test reports are furnished and show that
steel has been modified for weldability. Welding shall be done in accordance with
Company Engineering Standard TES-W-109.01, Rev. O.
(JJ/
CIFRIANO S. MAURJOO
G. All reinforcement accessories (spacers, chairs, etc.) required for spacing, assembling and
supporting reinforcement shall be plastic (PVC or HDPE) accessories and shall be subject
201'-"""
to approval.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT 3.05 STRUCTURAL STEEURAIL TRACK STEEL

A Structural steel shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A36M/ASTM A572M.

B. Where shown in the drawings, rail track steel shall be provided for easy movement of the
transformers durinq maintenance. The Contractor shall design/propose the type and size
of rails using the transformer manufacturer's suggestions/requirements/
recommendations. They shall rest and bolted on reinforced concrete ballasts/supports,
which will be designed/proposed by the Contractor and submit drawings for review.
DATE: 1011-lli-86

C. Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A325M, ASTM
A563M and ASTM F436 respectively.

D. Structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the
11115 BRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR requirements of 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01. Bolts, nuts, washers and palnuts shall be
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING galvanized in accordance with the requirements of 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
E. Welding shall conform to COMPANY Engineering Standard for "General Welding Criteria"
TES-W-109.01. Rev. O.

[ROLl

F. Anchor bolts shall conform to Standard Drawing SC-036128. Full length of anchor bolts
shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with 01-TMSS-01, Rev. 01.

G. Design, fabrication and erection of steel structures shall be in accordance with latest
revision of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

I H. Design, fabrication and erection of latticed steel structures shall be in accordance with the

I.
latest revision of AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

CONTRACTOR shall submit all fabrication and erection drawings for COMPANY review
and comments. No fabrication shall commence until all fabrication drawings are approved
and marked "Issued for Construction".
g ~ N _

J. All steel structures shall be fabricated from a COMPANY approved steel fabricator.
REVISIONS CONTRACTOR shall submit the assembly and fabrication drawings for COMPANY review
and comments in coordination with the steel fabricator. Assembly and fabrication
PREl"ARED BY: ---==---1
ROL
drawings shall be signed and stamped by CONTRACTOR as well as steel fabricator.
DATE: Fabrication shall not commence until all fabrication drawings are approved and marked
CHK'I> BY: "Issued for Construction" by SEC.

3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS, MORTAR AND GROUT

(M/ A Non-load bearing concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C129, Type II. The
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO
surfaces of CMU shall be fair-faced, strain-free ready to receive paint. The CMU shall be
'01""" true to shape and size, free from flaws, cracks and other defects. CMU with broken edges
and otherwise damaged shall not be used.

B. The CMU wall shall be cured continuously for at least seven (7) days.
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

C. Where wall heights are not an exact number of courses, the extra height shall be made
up with cast-in-place concrete with minimum compressive strength of 38 MPa. The
surface finish shall be similar to the adjacent CMU.

F/&
BY:

DATI: ZOI~
D. Horizontal reinforcement shall be ladder or truss type, pre-fabricated from steel
conforming to ASTM A82 and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A116, Class 1 or
Class 3, or ASTM A153, CB-2. Minimum size of horizontal reinforcement shall be 9
gauges.

E. Vertical reinforcement shall conform to SASO SSA-2 with a yield stress of 420 MPa.
Deformations shall conform to ASTM A615M. Minimum size of vertical reinforcement shall
be 12mm diameter.
THIS BRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR F. At the interface of concrete elements (beams, columns) and CMU walls, expanded metal
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
lath and dovetail anchors shall be provided.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlED AND DATED
G. All the plastering accessories such as expanded metal lath, angle bead, control joint
bead, strip mesh, comer mesh, block work reinforcement, plaster stop bead, etc., shall be
galvanized steel.

[ROLl

H. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M and shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 17 MPa at twenty-eight (28) days:

Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type V

Lime ASTM C207, Type S
Sand ASTM C144

I I.
Proportions by Volume: 1 part cement, 1/4 part lime and 3 to 3-3/4 parts sand

Masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C476 and shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 21 MPa at twenty-eight (28) days.

Portland Cement ASTM C150, Type V

Lime ASTM C207, Type S
REVISIONS
Aggregate ASTM C404, maximum coarse aggregate size shall be 9.5mm
PBEPAlID> BY: ROL
Slump shall not be less than 200mm.
DATE:

CHK'DBV:

3.07 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A General
(JJ/
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO 1. All doors, except toilet doors, shall open outwards and shall be weather-tight to
prevent moisture, dust and sand from entering inside the building.
"12-06-'>6

2. Exterior and interior hollow metal doors shall be acoustically sealed, thermally
insulated, honeycombed core construction and approved and labeled for 3 hours
OPEllA11NG DEPARTMENT fire resistance rating as per Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

3. Doors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 80, NFPA 101, UL 63 and HCIS-
SEC-09.

4. Fire endurance tests of door assembly shall be performed in accordance with NFPA

p-.ilWl
BY:
M All
5.
252.

Hollow metal doors shall be fabricated in conformance with the requirements of

DATE: II 201:z.o6..Ufi Steel Door Institute (SOl) specifications, SOI-100.

6. Hollow metal doors shall be erected in accordance with the requirements of Steel
Door Institute (SDI) specifications, SDI-105.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
7. Hardware of hollow metal doors shall be in accordance with the requirements of
CONSTRUCfION OR Steel Door Institute (SDI) specifications, SDI-107.
FOR ORDERING
MATDUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
8. Minimum fire rating of all exterior and interior doors shall be 3 hours.

9. All doors shall be bonded together with braided copper clad steel and shall be
grounded to substation grounding.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAL/CIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 47
T448 A PTS·11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

10. The fire resistance ratings of all the doors and hardware shall be certified by an
accredited independent testing agency acceptable to COMPANY.

11. Door frames shall be completely filled with cement grout with minimum compressive
strength of 21 MPa.

I 12.

13.
Metal surfaces of doors shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, scale, grease rough
spots and other foreign matters that may prevent proper paint adhesion.

All surfaces of doors and frames shall be applied or sprayed with one coat of rust-
inhibitive metallic oxide zinc chromate or synthetic resin primer and finished with
catalytically cured epoxy coating system. Primer shall be baked-on in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations for developing maximum hardness and
resistance to abrasion. Primed surfaces shall be smooth and suitable to receive the
REVISIONS
finish coat.
PRUARED BY: ROL
---'=---/
14. All surfaces of doors and frames shall be coated with two (2) coats of high gloss
DATE: epoxy paint. The paint shall be suitable for application over the galvanized surfaces.
CHK'DBV:

15. Metal spreaders on frames to be set in concrete are to remain in place. Metal
spreaders on frames set at finished floor level shall not to be removed until frames
are securely anchored in place with permanent anchors.
au!
CIPRIANO S. MAURICIO 16. Painting work to doors and frames shall be in accordance with TES-H-107.01 and
color shade shall be as per TES-H-107.02.
,.. ,...".

17. The size of doors shall be adequate for the easy movement of biggest equipment,
while sizing the door CONTRACTOR shall provide the documents for the biggest
OPERATING DEPARTMENT equipment that shall be moved in and out of the door.

18. All door (exterior and interior) locks including fire exit hardware lock devices shall be
master keyed to one system as per TES-P-119.19.

19. CONTRACTOR shall submit all fabrication and erection drawings for COMPANY
review and comments. No fabrication shall commence until all fabrication drawings
r;/ 'ftf::L Y are approved and marked "Issued for Construction".
BY:
M/!':ZJ2
DATE: a. Submit shop drawings indicating the following:

Elevations of each door and frame type

Profile and thickness of metal
Wall conditions and anchorage details
THIS DBAWING IS NOT Typical and special details of construction
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Label requirements
FOR ORDERJNG
MATERIALS lJNTll.
Finished hardware location, reinforcing and preparation
CERTIFIED AND DATED Specification for surface preparation and shop priming
Other pertinent and necessary information

[ROLl

b. Samples: Submit three (3) 300mm x 300mm section of door showing intemal
construction, edge detail and reinforcement for butts, three (3) "L" section of
frame showing corner detail and two (2) 300mm length of removable stop.

c. Submit all the technical literature and sample board of all the hardware.

20. Doors shall be installed by door fabricator or on his behalf, by a professional door
installer approved by the manufacturer and acceptable to the COMPANY.
Contractor is not authorized to install the door by himself, unless the manufacturer
approves him as their authorized installer. However, the door manufacturer is
responsible for professional installation.

Contractor shall submit the installation procedure for COMPANY review and
approval.
REVISIONS

21. Double leaf doors with more than 2.40m in height shall be provided with awning
PREPAREDBY: ----':="-1
KOL
transom panel. Lifting and holding arrangement of awning transom panel shall be
DATE: mechanical. Details shall be provided for COMPANY review and approval.
CDK'DBY:

22. Double leaf doors shall be provided with roller moving on rail. The rail shall be
embedded in the concrete floor and flushed with room floor finished level.

23. Store rooms shall be provided with double leaf doors.

UI/
CIPRIANO SoMAUlUCIO

B, Door Leaves
2<JIU6-O<i

1. Doors shall be fabricated from 1.5mm (gauge 16) hot-dip galvanized steel sheet
conforming to ASTM A446; Grade D. Steel sheets shall be galvanized as per ASTM
OPEltATING DEPARTMENT A525M, with coating class Z-275 (275 g/m2 ) .

2. Doors shall be reinforced with galvanized steel channel or Z shaped members

minimum 1.5mm thick, full height of door, spaced not more than 150mm on centers
and spot welded to face sheets 75mm on center, or doors shall be reinforced with
continuous truss, full height and width, spot welded to face sheets 75mm on centers
both vertically and horizontally.

3. Doors shall be provided with 1.87mm (gauge 14) horizontal stiffener channels at top
and bottom of doors welded to face sheets.

4. Doors shall be provided with 1.87mm (gauge 14) stile channels welded to face
sheets.

TmS DRAWING IS NOT 5. Prepare door opening for hardware. All joints and corners of the assembly shall be
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR face welded and ground smooth.
FOR ORDDUNG
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
6. All hollow portions of the doors shall be filled completely with fiberglass insulation or
solid core rigid polyurethane (foam-in-placed)/pre-foamed polystyrene insulation.
The insulation material shall be such that the U factor is not greater than 0.568 WI
(m2-K).
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 49
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

7. Exposed joints shall be fully welded, filled and ground smooth.

8. Interlocking joints or seams shall not be made on faces or edges of doors.

9. Doors shall have a 3mm bevel on the strike side.

I 10.

11.
Doors shall not have more than 3mm clearance at jambs and headers and 6mm
from the finished floor.

Door panels shall be free from buckles, twists or other imperfections. Panels shall
not have a buckle exceeding 1.5mm, as determined by a straight edge applied to the
face of the panel.

12. All door edges shall be filled with mineral filler to conceal seams.
REVISIONS

13. CONTRACTOR shall install the doors plumb, square and in true alignment. Adjust
PREPABID BYl ROL
doors to required clearances and tolerances as per NFPA 80.
DAn:

CBK'DBY:
C. Door Frames

1. Metal frames shall be fabricated from 2mm thick galvanized steel sheet. Bends shall
be brake formed to assure true, sharp radii and to minimize camber, comers shall be
()JJ/ fully welded.
CIPRIANO SoMAURICIO

2. Door frames shall be fabricated to have minimum 66mm width of frames, double
201""" backbends to enable the frames to grip the wall firmly, double rabbet type and
depths (see item-3 below) shall be sized to fit the wall thickness.

OPERATING DEPARTMI:NT 3. For exterior and interior, the depth of frame shall be different. For exterior walls, the
depth of the frames shall be arrived on the basis that there is heat insulation with its
supporting framework and gypsum board. For interior walls, the depth shall be
arrived on the basis that the there shall be plastering/tiles on both sides of the walls.
The width of frames shall be such that a projection of 15mm shall be provided from
the face of the wall.

~Bcl
BY:

DATE: 201~
4. Frames shall have all construction joints welded full depth and width, or welded with
equivalent splice plates on the unexposed faces of frames. Exposed surfaces of
welded joints shall be dressed to produce invisible connections. Reinforcements and
stiffeners shall be welded to inside surfaces of frames.

5. Exterior door frames (header and jambs) and door bottom shall be provided with
neoprene compressible seal.
THIS ORAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR 6. CONTRACTOR shall install the frames plumb, square and in true alignment. Use
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL installation spreader at base, strike and mid-top locations to insure constant and
CERTIFIED AND DATED
proper jamb opening for door.
7. Frames set at grade shall be provided with an angular base anchor or steel plate at
each jamb, 38mm x 38mm depth less 3mm. Jamb legs to be furnished with two (2)
holes for power driven attachment to floor.
[ROLl

~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~4JfSl141.".....J\ ~~l

.=.
~
=
~
is D. Door Hardware

1. All door hardware shall be heavy duty.

2. Hardware provision for hollow metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the

;
z
manufacturer's plant in accordance with template fumished and shall be drilled and
tapped to receive hardware as indicated on the hardware templates. Preparation
~ shall conform to ANSI A115.1.
"
Hardware SDecifications
Hinges Provide doors with 5mm thick steel reinforcement welded to frames.
Hinges shall be heavy duty/high frequency full mortised stainless
0
z '" H
- steel ball bearing, concealed type. Hinges shall have five (5) knuckle
ball bearings, non-removable stainless steel pins when door is
REVISIONS
closed. Hinges shall be 127mm x 127mm in size with minimum
FltEPAItED BY: ROL thickness of 4mm. Minimum of four (4) hinges shall be provided on
,,,,...J.
any door. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 or A156.7. Hinges
DATE:

I:::W.~
shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
CBK'DBY:
.. ~-, Thresholds a. Exterior Doors: All exterior doors shall swing outwards and shall
be provided with thresholds of extruded aluminum alloy
Am!QYm
conforming to ASTM 6221. Thresholds shall be maximum of
13mm thick and 100mm wide by the required length.
at/
s.
CIPRIANO MAURICIO b. Interior Doors: Extruded aluminum alloy, 13mm x 100mm by the
required lenqth
,,,""'-'" Doorstops a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for
doorstops welded to door. Doorstops shall be floor mounted,
75mm high with circular base 60mm in diameter.
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
b. Stops shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
Door Closers a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for closer
welded to door. Active and inactive leaves of double doors shall
be equipped with automatic door closers. Materials shall be
heavy duty; concealed or surface mounted type, full rack and

~t:t:i
pinion operation, control for both openings and closings/swings,
adjustable spring power, High strength cast iron cylinder,
BY:
hydraulic back-check, modern cover, tamper-proof, non-critical
DATE: '01""'-'"
regulating screws, liquid "X" temperature stable fluid, shall
permit door swing up to a minimum of 90°, shall have a choice of
closer arm direction.

b. Hinges shall be UL listed and ANSI certified, ANSI A156.4

TIllS ORAWING IS NOT
Grade 1 Standard.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
c. The door closer shall be able to close the door in the shortest
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
interval of time with uniform speed and without damage to the
person using the door.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 51
T448 A PTS·11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii ~l.j~ ;""..1.".....J\ z.spl
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
Q
s,
~
Q
~
Door Holders a. Provide doors with 4.5mm thick steel reinforcement for door
is holder welded to door. Door holders shall be made of cast brass,
heavy duty, shall have 150mm long arm and base shall be
40mm x 60mm, finish shall be satin chromium plate.

z b. Holders shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.

~
Weather Weather stripping of all doors shall be made to reduce air pressure
Stripping loss and also to provide protection against wind blown dust infiltration
'" into the building.
'"
Q

a. Astragal: Inactive leaf of double doors shall be provided with

field attached Z-shaped astragal. Shall be UL listed and ANSI
certified. Material shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or
0
z ~ N
- bronze with stain chromium plated finish.
REVISIONS
b. Door Gasketing: Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified. Material
PREPAREDBY: ROL shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or bronze housing a
durable neoprene insert for lasting performance with finish stain
DATE: "'"".". chromium olated.
CHK'DBY: -i.&v
LY~
Door Bumpers Material shall be cast brass with durable rubber.
Door a. This device is required for pair of doors; it shall prevent the
~ Coordinators inactive door of a pair of doors from closing and latching before
the active door closes and latches. It shall be heavy duty.
CIPRIANO
fI/.I
s. MAURICIO
Material shall be aluminum, stainless steel, brass or bronze with
finish stain chromium plated.

"'........ b. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified

Trim for a. For all exterior doors, the trims shall be "Key Lock Thumpiece".
exterior and
OI'£llA11NG DEPARTMENT interior doors b. For all interior doors, the trims shall be "Key Retract Latch Bolt".

These trims shall be able to receive the COMPANY master key

cylinder and shall be compatible with the fire exit devices.
Fire Exit a. Single Doors: Exit devices shall be push pad type, double
Devices cylinder. The device shall consist of lock stile cover, touch bar
end cap, touch bar, mechanism housing and mechanism end

r::g:;r/) , v b.
cap.

Devices shall be UL listed and fire rated for the doors, it shall
DAtE: 20'...... have special trim to accept ABUS (Euro) cylinder for master key
system. Lock shall be such that key retract and latch bolt.

c. Double Doors: Exit devices shall be push pad type, double

cylinder. The device shall consist of lock stile cover, touch bar
TIDS DRAWING IS NOT end cap, touch bar, mechanism housing and mechanism end
TO BE USED FOR
CONsmUCTION OR cap.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFlID AND DATED d. Fire exit devices for inactive doors shall be concealed with
vertical rod and shall be compatible with the active door exit
device.

[ROLl

"~ Locksets Locksets shall be provided to doors, which do not posses fire exit
is devices.

a. For interior doors - not master keyed

b. Exposed trim wrought brass, bronze or stainless steel, finish

'"'
Cl
c.
shall be satin chromium plated.

Keying shall be 6-pin tumbler with two-nickel silver keys per lock.
d. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified, ANSI A156.2 Series 4000,
Grade 1, lock knob torque requirements.
Indicating a. Provide to toilet main door.
Bolts
e
"
~ N
- b. Body, handle and keep shall be of zinc, finish shall be chromium
REVISIONS plated.

PRUAKEDBY: ROL c. Indicator case shall be of zinc, finish chromium plated with
201.......
emergency release feature.
DATE:

CBK'DBY: ~
d. Spindle shall be flat steel.
UW
AmIl!YI!!
e. Variant shall be angled with striking plate.
f. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
(fjJ/ Push Plates Materials shall be stainless steel with thickness 5mm; size shall be
CIPRIANO s, MAURICIO
100mm x 400mm with round comers.
2012-06-06 Pull Plates Materials shall be stainless steel with thickness 5mm, size shall be
100mm x 400mm with round comers and stainless steel 25mm
diameter rod.
Rubber Single doorframes shall be punched and provided with three (3)
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
Silencers rubber silencers. Double doorframes shall be punched to receive two
(2) rubber silencers. They shall be provided with metal spreaders.
Rubber silencers shall be shipped loose installed after final oalntino.
DoorSweepl a. Protection against weather, light, sound and dust shall be
Bottom provided for all exterior doors.
~J b. Shall be extruded aluminum housing a durable neoprene inserts
r:,.l!.7t [) for lasting performance. Door sweep shall be able to create a
BY:
positive contact seal with threshold. It shall be compatible with
DATE: 2012-06-l1ti
the threshold.

c. Shall be supplied with #6 sheet metal screws.

d. Finish shall be satin chromium plated.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR e. Shall be UL listed and ANSI certified.
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

[ROLl

Anchors Frames in reinforced concrete columns/hollow masonry block walls

shall be anchored by means of expansion anchor bolts. Anchors shall
be located not more than 150mm from top and bottom of each jamb
with intermediate anchors spaced at 400mm on centers. Expansion
anchor bolts shall be made of malleable iron or steel. At the location
of each expansion anchor bolt the jamb shall be reinforced with 5mm
thick steel plate welded to inside of the frame (iamb) and spot welded
to the backbends. Anchor bolts shall be minimum 10mm diameter by
150mm 10nQ.
Hardware a. Reinforcement for butts shall be 5mm thick by 230mm long and
Requirements 6mm narrower than the thickness of the door.

b. Reinforcement for locks and escutcheons shall be box type of

4mm thick steel spring leaf contacts for lock cases.
REVISIONS
c. Reinforcement for fire exit device and mortised or surface
ROL
PREPARED BY: ---'==----1 applied hardware shall be minimum 4mm thick and by template
DATE:
requirements as to length and width.
CIIK'DBY:
d. Provide all doors and frames with minimum 4mm reinforcing as
necessary to support the hardware schedule. Drilling and
tapping for surface applied hardware to be performed at the
building site.
(,,(,{;.,/
Cll'RlANO s.MAURICIO e. Wall Anchors: Same material and thickness as the frames

f. Frame Splines: Same material and thickness as the frames

g. Hinge Reinforcement: 5mm x 45mm x 250mm

OPltRATING DEPARTMiNT h. Strike Reinforcement: 5mm x 40mm x 100mm

i. Holder and Closer Reinforcement: 5mm by the required length &

width

3.08 WALL AND ROOF THERMAL INSULATION

Roof and exterior walls of the building thermal insulation shall be installed as per the
requirements of Standard TES-P-119.19.

3.09 FIBERGLASS WALL INSULATION

TmS DRAWING IS NOT A Wall insulation shall be highly efficient, lightweight, strong, resilient and easy to handle,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUrnON OR flexible insulation, composed of fine, stable and uniformly textured inorganic glass fibers
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
bonded together by a non-water soluble and fire retardant thermosetting resin.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

B. The insulation blanket shall be laminated with foil reinforced Kraft paper, vinyl Kraft or
other specific vapor barrier to prevent condensation (both sides).
3
C. Nominal thickness shall be 64mm with density of 12 kg/m .
[ROLl

E. Base fiberglass shall be non-combustible and shall conform to UL 723, ASTM E84 or
ASTM E136.
z

~'"is
F. It shall be UL listed, Le., shall conform to UL 273, and fire tests of building construction
material.

G. Installation:

1. Between the metal studs, the insulation can be friction-fit in place. In areas where it
will be applied in heights over 2.5m, supplementary support should be provided to
g ~ N ~

hold insulation in place.

REVISIONS
2. When applied to masonry walls, the insulation can be fixed by impaling on pins or
PREPARIDBY: ROL
other similar attachments and then affixing a locking washer to hold the insulation in
DATE: 10124lJ6 place.
CBK'DBY: '7Al.-
(Y\ll

AmIl!Ym
3.10 DRYWALL SYSTEM AND GYPSUM BOARDS

(J.{/ A- Dry wall System

CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO
The heat insulation and gypsum board shall be fixed to interior face of exterior walls by
2012--06-Oli steel stud system. The steel stud system shall consist of steel framing, made of floor and
ceiling metal runners and studs, formed from hot-dip galvanized steel sheeting, with the
following specifications:
OPERA'fINGDErAR'fMENT
Steel Quality ASTM A525 and ASTM A527, Lock forming quality
2
Hot-dip galvanized, with coating Class G-90 (275 g/m )

The studs and runners shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C645.

Dimensions and shape of studs Dimensions and shape of Runners

~~fJ.
MOY!.:J!.. ,I..
BY:
All
C shape
Flanqe width: 29mm
C shape
Hance width: 34mm
Depth: 70mm Depth: 75mm
DATE:
'01"""" Thickness: 1.5mm Thickness: 1.5mm
Runners shall be spaced 600mm center to center.

Installation: Installation of studs and runners commences with ceiling and floor runners
THIS DRAWING IS NOT being aligned and secured in position with SUitable fastenings. Steel studs are secured
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCflON OR
vertically in position at appropriate centers, by inserting into the runner and twisting
FOR ORDERING through 90°, 610mm center for 16mm thick board.
MATERlALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

Location of studs shall not be more than 50mm from door jambs, abutting partitions, and
other construction. Studs located adjacent to doors, partition corners and other
construction and corners shall be secured to the vertical flanges of the runner by positive
fiXings, either screws or pop rivets.
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
380/115kV BSP 55
JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX·Vlllb
T448 A PT5-11 EN367 OF 0
SHEOGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

A cut to length section of runner with base at each end shall be placed horizontally over
doorframe and secured by screws to the adjacent vertical studs. A cut to length stud shall
be positioned at the location of vertical joints over the doorframe header, extending to the
ceiling runner and similar treatment to other openings.

A knurled surface on the stud provides non-skid entry for pan head and dry wall screws,
using an electric screwdriver. Knockouts shall be provided in the studs for concealed
services.

B. Gypsum Wallboards

1. Gypsum boards shall conform to ASTM C36, Type X (special fire retardant), shall
provide at least one (1) hour fire retarding rating.
REVISIONS

2. Minimum thickness shall be 16mm. Edges shall be tapered.

PREPAREI>BY: ---'=--f
ROL

DAn: 3. Gypsum boards shall consist of incombustible gypsum plaster core with fiberglass
CHK'DBY: incorporated, surfaced with special cardboard bonded to core.

4. The back surface of the foil-backed gypsum wallboard shall, in addition, be covered
with aluminum foil.
()J/ 5. It shall be UL listed, i.e., shall conform to UL 263, and fire tests of building
CIl'lUANO S. MAURICIO

construction material.
'01'-""'"
6. Fire flame spread rating shall be 25.

Ol'l.RAnNG DEf'AIlTMENT
7. Gypsum wallboards shall be attached to steel stud system with self-drilling dry wall
screws.

8. The joints between the adjacent gypsum boards may be reinforced and concealed
with tape joint system, leaving the wall surface virtually free of joints.

9. Density shall be 1100 kg/m3.

10. Average breaking stress shall not be less than 670N (bearing edges across fiber of
DATE: 2012-f16...06 surfacing) and 225N (bearing edges parallel to fiber of surfacing), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C473.

11. Joint treatment materials shall conform to ASTM C475.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT 12. Nails shall conform to ASTM C514.

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
IDR
MATERIALS
OJlDERlNG
UNTIL
13. Screws shall conform to ASTM C646, Type S, and ASTM C954.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

14. All accessories such as screws, joint tape, joint compound, comer tape, shall be
used for proper installation of gypsum board.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380J115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 56
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
i;i
tl SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "4~ ~~ a.s~l
Q
~
~
Q
~
3.11 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
is
A. General

1. Waterproofing membrane shall be a purpose design and have proven application in

z the Kingdom considering thermal expansion and contraction.

~
'"
2. CONTRACTOR shall submit samples and brochures of the product for COMPANY
"'" review and acceptance.

3. Waterproofing membrane shall be installed by the membrane manufacturer, or on

his behalf, by a professional waterproofing CONTRACTOR approved by the
g ~ N ~
manufacturer, acceptable to the COMPANY.
REVlSIONS
4. CONTRACTOR shall submit the installation procedure for COMPANY review and
rBEPAREDBY: ROL
approval.

DATE: mUl6oll6
5. The waterproofing material and the installation of the membrane shall be
'-w.,."{
CHK'D BY:
J-:>'
guaranteed for a minimum period of ten (10) years.

APPROVED B. Modified Bituminous Waterproofing Membrane

uti
C1PIUANO s.MAURIOO
1. This type of membrane shall be used especially for underground structures such as
cable basements/cable entry rooms, electrical manholes, communication
handholes, and septic tanks as well as for roofs.
>0.......

2. Membrane shall be bitumen modified with Attactic Polypropylene (APP). The

membrane shall be reinforced with isotropic spun bounded, non-woven polyester
OPERAnNG DEPARTMENT mat 4mm thick. Membrane shall have the following specifications:

Properties Typical Values Standards

Thickness Minimum4mm
Reinforcement: Non-woven oolvester 200 am/m 2
Ultimate Tensile Strength, N/5cm @ 25 DC ASTM 05147

~.;;;d1
BY:
M
Longitudinal
Transverse
Ultimate elongation, % @ 25°C
950
800

DATE: 2&12-06-Ofi
LongitUdinal 45
Transverse 50
Tear Resistance, N ASTM 05147
Longitudinal 600
Transverse 400
1lI1S DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR Softenina Point, DC 155 ASTM 036
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Low temperature flexibility, DC -6 to -10 ASTM 05147
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTlFlED AND DATED
Water Absorption, % Wt @ 23°C 24 hours Less than 1 ASTM 05147
Resistance to aging & UV No change greater than ASTMG53
Weather-O-meter 2000 hours 20% of the original values
Puncture Resistance, N 1155 ASTM E154
Water Vapor Transmission, a/m2/24 hours, Less than 0.5 ASTM E96
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX·V1l1b 57
T448 A PTS·11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,~jfSll4l~ as..;.JJ1
."!<.
" RH 90% at 38°C
~ Resistance to Leakage at Joints Pass UAEtc
Penetration, @ 25°C, dmm 20 ASTM D5
Dimensional Stability % ASTM D5147
Longitudinal + 0.5
z: Transverse - 0.5

..'"~
Load Strain product @ 25°C
Longitudinal 42,750
Transverse 40,000
'"
Lap joint strength, N/5cm (Longitudinal Same as membrane
and Transverse)
Installation Procedure: A layer of bituminous primer is cold applied on the cleaned
g ~ N ~ screed using a plaster roller with organic, solvent resistant wool.
REVISIONS The rolls of membranes are laid one by one on the dried primer and properly aligned
to cover the entire surface. Each membrane is re-rolled and unrolled systematically for
PREPARED BY: ROL
torching by means of a propane gas torch.
DATE: 101Ul6::llS

CBK'DBY: ~ Overlapping seams of adjacent rolls of membranes shall be torched and pressed

-
l./:J- tightly.

Control joints shall be provided at locations determined based on the geometry

configuration and drainage characteristics of the roof.
till
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO The waterproofing membrane shall pass over the parapet and be fixed under the
aluminum flashing.
2012-06-06

Between the levels, the protection of waterproofing vertical edges is provided by a

metal section (aluminum flashing) used as water drip. The metal section is nailed to
OPEllATlNG DEPARTMFNr
the vertical wall and its upper part is sealed using suitable elastic sealer. The
waterproofing membrane shall be raised on the walls to the same level of the
surroundino parapet.

c. Bituminous Roofing Primer

~
:;;I!'":c.
r<. Z
Y Roofing primer shall be formulated from highly pliable, flexible bitumen, select petroleum
solvents and compounded with wetting and saturation additives. It shall comply with
?:J"-
BY:
1/ All
ASTM D41 with the following specifications:
~

DATE:
10''''''' Properties Typical Values Standards
Densitv at 25°C, ka/liter 0.86 to 0.89 ASTM D70
Viscosity at 25°C, cps 70 -150 ASTM D88
Dryino time to touch at 25°C 3 hours
THlS DRAWING ]S NOT Drvina time, through at 25°C 24 hours
TO BE USED FOR
cossmucnox OR Non-volatile, % weiqht 45 (minimum) ASTM D402
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL Volatile, % weioht 55 (maximum) ASTM D402
CERTIFlED AND DATED
Water content Zero ASTM D55
Shelf life 2 vears
Penetration at 25°C of asphalt from ASTM D55
distillation UP to 360°C, dmm 20 - 50
[ROLl

1. Optimum penetration of primer into the surface pores, pinholes and cracks
2. The primer shall allow for better saturation, dust absorption and adhesion. Primer
z shall prepare the surface for a permanent and durable bond between the substrate
;..
~
and the membrane.

'" D. PVC waterproofing membrane

1. This type of membrane shall be used especially for roof of buildings.

0
z; ... N ~ 2. It shall be high polymer PVC waterproofing membrane with high tenacity polyester
REVISIONS
mesh reinforcement, UV stabilized. Membrane shall have the following
specifications:
PREl'AREDBY: HOL

DATE: 201""",,,
Properties Typical Values
CHK'DBY: -,LiVl.<.. Thickness 1.5mm
:-" ) .... Ultimate Tensile Strength, N/5cm
Longitudinal 1200
Am!2YEI!
Transverse 1100
Ultimate elongation
(()/ Longitudinal 300
CIFRlANO S. MAlIRICIO
Transverse 300
2012-06-06
Softening Point (OC) 180
Tear Resistance, N 250
Resistance to low temperature (OC) -20
Water absorption (maximum % Wt. Change) less than 0.025
OI'ERA.TlNG PEP ARTMl:NT
Hydrostatic resistance (N/cm 2 ) 250
Imoermeabilitv of the membrane to water under pressure (Bars) 7
Root Proof Yes
Chemical Resistance including Acids, Alkaline, Salts, Alcohol, Yes
Amines, Oils and Hydrocarbons with hich Concentration
jj~R'L!IM:;i Resistance to aging More than 5000
hours
rv'ff1V'"ff L2
BY; 7 Fire Resistance Yes
v
DAlE: 20lUl'-Ofj

E. Water flood tests

CONTRACTOR shall carry out water flood tests for at least seventy-two (72) hours by
impounding water over the roofs to check the adequacy of waterproofing membrane over
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
the roofs. For basements/cable entry rooms, manholes, handholes, trenches, oil catch
CONSTRUCTION OR basins, all de-watering operations shall be stopped completely after the installation of
FOR ORDERING
MATEIlIALS UNTIL waterproofing membrane. If any leakage is found inside the basement/cable entry
CERTIFlED AND DATED
room/cable tunnel or under the roof slab, the CONTRACTOR shall take all the remedial
measures acceptable to the COMPANY.

[ROLl

~
~ 3.12 ASPHALT CONCRETE
e
Asphalt concrete materials shall be in accordance with TCS-Q-113.01.

~ 3.13 BASE AND SUB-BASE MATERIALS

~
ei Base and sub-base materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.01.
'"
'"
Q

3.14 BACKFILL MATERIALS

0
z
.., N ~ Backfill materials shall satisfy the requirements of TCS-Q-113.02. Soil thermal resistivity
tests in addition to other tests shall be carried out on the backfill materials. The backfill
REVISIONS
materials shall have a maximum thermal resistivity of 1.2°KcmlW.
PREPARED BY; ROL

DAn; ,.'........ 3.15 PAINTING SYSTEM

CHK'DBY: ~
(j -r
A. Painting system shall conform to TES-H-1 07.01. Paint color code shall be as per TES-H-
AlrJlQYm 107.02. The paint system shall have the following properties:

()JJ/
CIPRIANO s. MAURIOO
1. Water resistant
2. Micro porous, allows surface to breath
3. Anti Carbonation
101""" 4. Flexible
5. Chemical resistant
6. Low maintenance costs
Ol'DtATlNG DEPARTMENT 7. Built-in sheen, keeping surface constantly fresh
8. Color retention & non-yellowing

B. Paint Selection Guide:

Exterior Concrete Surfaces Generic

tV
81':
7dJ
/11.<-
Ml.l..--r./!:. -\7j
First Coat
Second Coat
Top Coat
Acrylic Primer/Sealer
Acrylic Copolymer Resin Emulsion
Acrylic Textured Emulsion
DATEl 1011-06-06

CMU block wall Surfaces Generic

(Exterior)
First Coat Latex Primer/Sealer
nos DRAWING IS NOT Second Coat (Filler) Plastic Filler
TO BE USED FOR Too Coat (Two coats)
CONSTRUCTION OR
Medium texture (Emulsion)
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Battery Room Ceiling Generic
First Coat Epoxy Primer/Sealer
Second Coat (Filler) Eooxy Filler
Top Coat (Two coats) High Solid Polyamide cured Epoxy Semi-Gloss
Enamel
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3B0I115kV BSP
APPENDIX-V1l1b 60
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ~'-i.)fSll4l."....Jl ;"sy.:J1
"~
~

~ Galvanized Steel Surfaces Generic

First Coat (where not shop Two component etch primer containing phosphoric
bonderized) acid and rust-preventing pigments
First Coat (where not shop Two components epoxy/polyamide primer containing
z bonderized) zinc phosphate as corrosion inhibltinq piqment

i
l:l
Second Coat
Top Coat
Acrvlic Epoxy
Urethane Epoxy Enamel
'" Gypsum boards Generic
First Coat Acrvlic Primer/Sealer
Second coat Latex Vinyl Versatate Copolymer Resin
Top Coat Latex Vinyl Versatate Copolymer Resin
g ~ N ~

REVISIONS Surface Preparation:

PREPARED BY: HOL Concrete shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar, efflorescence or any film left from
DATE: 10t~
incompatible form oils or concrete curing compound. If form oils or incompatible curing
CHK'DBY; ~ compound are used, the surface shall receive sweep sandblast. Patch cracks and other
\J.Y-' blemishes prior to painting.

<Im!!m Masonry shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar, efflorescence and thoroughly dry.
Patch cracks and other blemishes too large to be covered with block filler.
tJ,lI
CIPRIANO s, MAVRlCIO Plaster must be hard and dry. Test plaster surfaces with a moisture meter and do not
proceed with painting until the moisture content satisfies the recommendation of the
'01,..... respective paint manufacturer. Remove grit, mildew, loose particles and repair surface
irregularities before paint is applied. Repair cracks and holes with patching plaster,
properly keyed to the exlstlnq plaster and sandpaper smooth.
OPItRATlNGDEPARTMENT
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove water-soluble dirt and chemicals with water and detergent;
solvent soluble contaminants with solvent. Rinse, allow to dry, then power or hand abrade
to remove oxides.

Gypsum board: Repair minor cracks and holes with finishing compounds and smooth

~ec
after drying.

.
BY:
..~D In order to check that the manufacturer color shades match with that of the COMPANY
,..,..... color shades, CONTRACTOR shall prepare the sample of color shades with texture at the
DATE:
site for inspection and approval.

3.16 PVC WATERSTOPS

TIDSDRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Preformed, flexible and extruded from high-grade polyvinyl chloride compounds for
FOR ORDERING sealing expansion, construction and contraction joints in concrete structures
MATERIALS UNrIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

Properties Nominal Values Standards

Water absorption 0.15 ASTM 0570
Tear Resistance 60 N/mm ASTM 0624
Ultimate Elongation 390% ASTM 0638
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX-Vlllb 61
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
f;i
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY . .4Jf11J ~~JLwIl1 ~~\
"
~
":< Tensile strength 15 MPa ASTM 0638
is Low temperature Passed at -35°F /-37°C ASTM 0746
brittleness
Stiffness in flexure 8.5 MPa ASTM 0747
Specific aravitv 1.37 ASTM 0792
z

;
~
Ozone resistance
Volatile loss
Hardness Shore A15
No failure
0.30%
76±3
ASTM 01149
ASTM 01203
ASTM 02240
"
Q
Accelerated extraction CROC572
Tensile strength 150 kg/cm2
Elongation 370%
Effect of alkali
0
z ... H H
Weight change +0.05%
REVISIONS Hardness chanae -1 point

PREPARED BY: RDL Site Jointing: The PVC waterstops shall be but-jointed by the process of heat fusion or
welding. A special portable wooden jig shall be used for welding and is used in
DAn: 2<11'-"""
conjunction with an electric welding blade. The end of the waterstop having been cut
CBK'DBY; hri\'Y.
~"'~ square, the jig is used to line up the two ends of the waterstop in precise opposition. The
heated blade is then inserted between the two ends and material is melted on contact.
6mIl!m The blade is then removed and the two ends of the waterstop pushed together in the jig
where they achieve fusion.
{,(JJ/
CIPRIANO s. MAURICIO Application: Use external waterstop systems for waterproofing basements/cable entry
rooms/cable tunnels and substructures. Flat dumbbell for construction/contraction joints.
"",..... Center Bulb for expansion/movement joints

OPEllAnNG DEPAllTMENT 3.17 NON-SHRINK GROUT

Grout shall be cement based fully complying with the requirements of ASTM C1107.
Grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic & chloride free, high performance, free flowing,
non-catalyzed, shrinkage compensated and hydrogen free system. The non-shrink grout
shall have folloWing specifications:

{~m Specifications

Compressive Strength
Values at 20De at
twenty-eight (28) days age
60 MPa
Remarks

Application, formwork,
DATE: 2<I''''''''V
Flexural Strenath 10 MPa mixing, consistency of
Coefficient of Thermal mixed grout. placing,
Expansion 11 X 10~ rc curing and cleaning,
Modulus of Elasticity 29,000 MPa storage, handling of
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT Mixing water shall be free for oils, acids. organic matter or the grout must be in
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than strict accordance with
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERJNG
UNTIL 500 parts per million (ppm) of total dissolved solids. the manufacturer's
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Minimum time of initial setting shall not be less than 3 hours instructions.
Minimum time of final settina shall not exceed 8 hours
Fluidity of grouts shall be high fluidity, 10-30 seconds flow
when tested in accordance with ASTM C939.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA. TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 62
T448 A PTS·11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii 9-~J6S.ll ,-:!J.."....Jl a.s~
tI SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~

~
~
0
3.18 POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A single component, liquid applied, moisture cure, polyurethane waterproofing membrane

~ with the following properties:

~
0:1
Priming Coat and Subsequent Coats (Aromatic Formulation)
"
Properties Typical Values
Color Black
Modulus at Break 3 MPa
0
z ~ N N Ultimate Elongation 400%
REVISIONS
Tear Resistance 25 kN/m
Tensile Set Recoverv 95%
PREPAREDBY: ROL Adhesion to Mortar 3000 N/m
Hardness Shore A 45
DATI;
'01""" Permeability to water vaoor 0.4 metric oerms
CRK'DBY: 'h.A\\.
~_:L>
Recoatabilitv Excellent
Thickness Minimum number of first and subsequent coats shall
~
be two (2) or dry film thickness shall not be less than
600 microns, whichever produces hiaher thickness.
(LPl Chemically resistant to alkalis, acids, chlorides and sulfates and can withstand service
CII"RlANO s,MAtIRIOO
temperature up to 90°C.
201:uJ6.l16
Top Coat (Aliphatic Formulation)

Properties Typical Values

OI'ERATlNG DIJ'AIlTMENT
Color White
Ultimate Elonaation 30%
Tear Resistance 7.5 kN/m
Tensile Strength 22 MPa
Hardness Shore A 85+5
;;:z;) Total solids bv weiaht & volume 60%
'V..lJ..;»: Ij Thickness Minimum number of coats shall be four (4) or the
dry total film thickness shall not be less than 400
BY:
DATE: :W':uJ6.lI6 microns, whichever oroduces hiaher thickness.

3.19 COAL TAR EPOXY

TIDS DRAWING ]8 NOT A two-component, high-build, high-solids (at least 90%) coal tar and epoxy resin with the
TO BE USED FOR
CONS1'RUcnON OR following properties:
FOR ORDERlNG
MATEIUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Properties Typical Values Standards
Bond Strength to Concrete 3MPa
Bond Strenath to Steel (Sandblast) 7.5 MPa
Heat Deflection Temperature 60°C or above ASTM D648
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP APPENOIX-Vlllb 63
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
;:
tJ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "4.;fS.ll~."....Jl a.s~\
=
i.
~
=
~
Potential Health Hazard during application I None
is and in-service I
Priming coat shall be suitably selected separately for steel and concrete, and approval
shall be obtained from the COMPANY.

~
'"
3.20 CEMENTITIOUS ELASTOMERIC IMPERMEABLE MEMBRANE

"'" A polymer modified cementitious coating material, when cured; it shall form an
elastomeric impermeable membrane with the following properties:

Prceerties Tvoical Values Standards

g ~ N ~ Resistance to Water Surface Positive 7 bar (70m head of DIN 1048
REVISIONS
water)
Crack Accommodation Excellent
PREPARED BY: ROL Static and Dynamic
CO 2 & Chloride Ion Diffusion Excellent
DATE: 20'>--'
CHK'DBY: -us- Resistance
~
Bond to Damp Concrete Excellent

3.21 REPAIR MORTARS

~
CIPRIANOs. MAURICIO
High performance, free flowing, non-metallic, non-shrink, cementitious micro concrete,
'01""" with the following properties, tested for flowable consistency at 20°C and twenty-eight (28)
days age:

OPERATINGDEPARTMENT
Properties Typical Values
Compressive Strenath at 28 Davs aae 58MPa
Modulus of Elasticitv at 28 Davs aae 29,000 MPa
Slant Shear Bond Strength with 60 MPa
Concrete at 28 davs aae
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion 11 x 10"""rC

~od!i:i
Chloride Ion Penetrability Very low (less than 1000 Coulombs as per
ASTM C1202)
MO
BY: Setting Time at 20°C
DATE: f '01""" Initial 5.5 hours (minimum)
Final 7.5 hours (minimum)
Flexural Strenath 10MPa
For repair sections deeper than 100mm, use properly graded 8mm to 12mm silt free
aaareaate washed with clean water.
nus DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUcnON OR
JiQR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
3.22 CONCRETE SURFACER

A single component polymer modified cementitious fairing coat, designed for vertical (and
also overhead), used to infill honeycombing and voids up to 3mm deep. and as a blow

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV SSP
APPENDIX·V1l1b 64
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~
e SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 'ITJfSll4J~ 4..sy1l1
!'
~
~
hole filler up to 10mm deep. Following test results obtained at a water powder ratio of
is 0.3:1 by weight and temperature range of 20°C to 35°C.

Prooertles Tvolcal Values

Compressive Strength at 20°C 30 MPa
z Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion 7 to 12 x 107C

i
'"
ii
Bond Strength to Concrete
Flexural Strenqth
Workina Life
23MPa
7MPa
Approximate 45 minutes to 20 minutes

3.23 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS

g ~ N ~

REVISIONS Epoxy resin based, low viscosity, non-shrinking bonding material, conforming to ASTM
C881-90, Type IV, Class C and satisfying the following requirements:
PREPARED BY: ROL

DATE: 2OIU16.116
Properties Typical Values
'"'l!.fk Comoressive Strength at 7 days age 95MPa
CRK'DBY; l-,,__
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion at 7 davs age 5.5 x 10-orC
Adhesive strength on dry concrete at 7 days age 3MPa
~
Flexural Strength at 7 days aoe 40MPa
Tensile strenath at 7 days aae 30 MPa
tJa/
CIPRIANO s, MAURIOO
Modulus of elasticitv at 7 davs 3400
Elongation at break at 7 days 4%
",,...... Heat deflection temperature (HDT) as determined by 65°C or above
ASTM D648
Coefficient of viscosity at 23°C 10 mPas
OPERATING DEPARTMINT
Pot life 2 hours at 20°C
24 minutes at 40·C
Chemically resistant to alkalis, acids, chlorides, sulfate. Compatible with dry and damp
concrete.

{/-fjWWf) 3.24 EPOXY ZINC-RICH PAINT/PRIMER

BY: A two-component (base & curing agent), metallic zinc-rich epoxy primer. High
DATE: 201........ performance to give maximum protection to aggressive environments. The material shall
comply with the composition and performance requirements of SSPC Paint 20.

Properties Typical Values Remarks

Color Grey
THIS DRAWING IS NOT Gloss level High Application, cleaning,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Thickness 50 - 75 microns DFT storage, handling, etc.,
FOR ORDERING
MATERIAUi UNTIL 85-127 microns WFT must be in strict
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Mix Ratio 4 parts base: 1 part curing agent accordance with the
Volume Solids 59% manufacturer's
Densitv 2600 kg/m 3 instructions.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 65
1448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

Drying time 75 minutes at 25°C (Touch dry)

4 hours at 25°C (Hard dry)
Application method Airless Sorav

3.25 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Conduits

1. Plastic conduits and fittings shall be made of extra strength PVC plastic utility duct
for underground installation of communication cables. PVC conduits and fitting type
shall be DB, designed for direct burial in underground trenches with a requirement
for concrete encasement in concrete or type EB, designed for encased burial in
REVISIONS
concrete when installed in underground trenches.

PREPARED BY: ----===----1

ROL 2. Plastic conduits and fittings shall meet the requirement of 23-TMSS-01 and
following as specified below:
DATE:

CHK'DBY:
3. PVC plastic conduits compound shall meet the minimum cell classification of PVC
12154 as per ASTM D4396.

4. PVC plastic duct fittings shall meet the minimum cell classification of PVC 11232 as
per ASTM D4396.
CIPRIANO S. MAUlUOO

5. PVC solvent cements shall be as per ASTM D2564 and applied as per ASTM F402
'01.......
for safe handling of solvent cements.

6. PVC duct bell ends, where permitted/required, shall be as per the dimensions listed
OPERATING DEPARTMENT in Table 2-2 of NEMA TC8.

7. PVC ducts and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible
cracks, holes, burrs, foreign inclusions, or other defects that could damage cables.

B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Galvanized Conduits

Rigid conduits shall be hot-dip galvanized with PVC coating, fittings shall be threaded and
hot-dip galvanized.
DATE: ZOl1-fi.06

3.26 SUB DUCTS

A. Sub ducts on straight runs installed in the underground ductbanks shall have 32mm
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR outside diameter, their inner walls shall be smooth and their pUlling length shall not
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING exceed 450 meters. They shall comply with specification DIN 8074, DIN 8075 AND
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
MOPTT specification MAT2301 (Issue #1).

B. SUb ducts on handholes and inside the buildings shall be corrugated, flexible and fire
resistance shall be 2 hours with 32mm outside diameter. Sub duct installation shall be in
accordance with SCS-T-557.08.
[ROL]

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 66
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY "4~ ~J~ ~,;.JJI
~
~

~
is 3.27 GEOTEXTILES

Geotextiles basic uses are for drainage, reinforcement, filtration, separation, protection
and sealing. Geotextiles are used in various construction applications such as dewatering,
z erosion control, road stabilization, roads, roof waterproofing, etc. The fabric shall be non-
0
woven, made from polyester or propylene fibers, and shall have the following
~
...0
~
specifications:

Properties Values Standards

Thickness Not less than 2mm under 2
kN/m2
Unit weiaht 200 urarns/rn"
0
z ~ N ~

Punchina Strenath Not less than 100 ka/cm2

REVISIONS Highly resistant to UV radiation, weather action, temperature variation and
acids/alkalis
PREPARED BY: ROL

DATI: 201'1-llall

CBK'D BY: ~1.tMv 3.28 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER/BACK-UP MATERIALS

-
.~

Joint filler materials shall be extruded closed cell polyethylene foam rod or polyurethane
foam rod. Joint filler shall be of suitable sizes and shapes so that when compressed (25
to 50%) it shall fit in the joints as required. Sealant shall not be applied without filler
tA{;/ material and bond breaker strip. Preformed Joint Fillers shall comply with the
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO
requirements of ASTM D1752. It shall have the following specifications:
'01.......
Properties Tvolcal Values
Tear strenqth Greater than 1.0 N/cm2
Water absorption and high water vapor transmission Extremely low
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
Temoerature ranee Wide
Resistant to insect attack or pest damage and shall be High
unaffected by fungi, moss, lichen, molds or bacteria
Resistance to chemicals, acids, alkalis and oils High

~BdJ.
BY:

DAn:: 16'.......
3.29 PROTECTION BOARDI COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER BOARD

Protection board is used to protect underground waterproofing membrane. Joint filler

board is used in concrete joints. It shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D1751. It
shall have the following specifications:

Properties Typical Values Standards

Highly resilient soft wood fibers Impregnated with minimum
mJS DRAWING IS NOT 20% bitumen
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Densitv 325 ka/rn"
FOR ORDERING
MATERJAl.'l UNTIL Thickness 15mm for waterproofing
CERTIFIED AND DATED
membrane protection
as required for concrete
ioints
Load required compressing the ASTM D545
test piece to 50% of nominal 5.2 MPa
(ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INOEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 67
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
:;i
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ,~JfSJ.l ~J",....JI4..s~1

"~
~

thickness
~ Weight Loss during 50% '::'3% ASTM D1751
Comoression
Recovery within 10 minutes >80% ASTM D545
Water Absorption after 24 hours <10% ASTM D545
~ Extrusion at 50% Compression <1mm ASTM D545

~
gj
Bendina Strenath
Densitv Air Dry Filler
3.0 MPa
>394 ko/rn" ASTM D545
" Solid Content 100%
Weather Resistance -40°C to 130°C under
normal usage
Must not deform or break under normal handling
g ~ N ~
It shall be immune to dry and wet rot, fungus and most forms of insect attack or
REVISIONS similar forms of deterioration.

PREPARID BY: ROL

3.30 POLYETHYLENE SHEETS
DATE: 201Z-oQI6

CHK'DBY; ~
'-~-"'" Polyethylene sheets shall conform to ASTM E154. They shall have the following
specifications:
~
Properties Typical Values Standards
tW
CIPRIANOs, MAURICIO
Color
Film thickness
Transoarent clear
150 microns
Impact Strength 1600 kg/m"
'01"""" Yield Strength 125 kg/em' Minimum ASTMD638
Ultimate Elonaation 850 - 900% ASTMD638
Coefficient of Friction 0.5 Minimum
OPERA11NG DEPARTMENT Shear Modulus 1600 kg/em"
Density. Heavy-duty low- 0.22 grams/em' ASTM D1505
densitvoowethvlene
Temperature Resistance -30°C to 90°C Retain its flexibility over
80°C temperature
1% Sealant Modulus 18.5 to 23 kN/m' ASTMD638

~gd
BY:
OHAM
Vicat Softening
Tensile Strenath at Break
99°C
1800 to 2200 N/cm'
ASTM D1525
ASTM D638
Elmendorf Tear Strenath 3.3/6.0arams/micrometer ASTM D1922
DATE: 201~
Dart Drop Impact 600/400 grams ASTM D1709

a. Punctures and tears in vapor barriers shall be patched. Edges shall be lapped not
less than 100mm and end joints shall be lapped not less than 150mm. Edges and
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
laps shall be sealed with a pressure sensitive tape not less than 40mm, compatible
TO BE USED FOR with membrane.
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED b. The polyethylene sheet shall be UV stabilized to prolong its life, retain its physical
properties and remain chemically resistant to aggressive soil conditions attack by
soil organism (bacteria, etc.), plant life and other soil fauna (molds, algae, etc.),
resistance to corrosive effects of ground water sulfates and chloride.

[ROLl

3.31 ALUMINUM FLASHING

Aluminum sheet shall conform to ASTM B209, temper H14, alloy 1050 and shall be used
to fabricate aluminum flashing to the required/approved profile.

I 3.32 CONCRETE EPOXY FLOOR DUST PROOFER AND HARDENER

A. The material shall be four-component system, consists of binder (epoxy resin), hardener
(magnesium silicon fluoride), aggregate and pigment. These components shall be pre-
weighed for site mixing strictly as per the recommendations of the manufacturer. After
application, it shall produce the following features:
REVISIONS
1. It shall chemically react with free lime and calcium salts in hardened concrete to
PREPARED BY: ROL
make it more dense and durable surface.

DATE::
2. It shall penetrate concrete surface and make it hard, free from dusting and high
CBK'DBY:
resistant to corrosion and abrasion.

3. Chemically resistant - resists acids, alkalis, oils and salts

4. Durable - good wear abrasion resistance

aa/
CIPRlANO S. MAURICJO

5. Hygienic - Impervious, self-leveling, seamless floor surface, which is easily cleaned

'm.....
6. Nominal thickness shall be 3mm. Smooth and glossy finish and light reflective
surface
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

7. Floor hardener shall achieve compressive strength of 55 MPa and flexural strength
of 34 MPa at 7 days when tested to BS 6319.

B. Surface preparation of old and new concrete floors:

1. General

It is essential that the surface preparation of the concrete is done correctly;

DATE: 201:z..0i.06
otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained.

New concrete: It is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28
days before applying the coating. The moisture content of the concrete should be
below 4% by weight. The release of surface water is dependent on the thickness of
TJDS DRAWING IS NOT
the concrete, the season, the temperate and relative humidity of the environment
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
and the prevailing ventilation conditions. Due to the above, the moisture content of
FOR ORDDING the concrete should always be checked/measured prior to the coating application.
MATERIALS IJNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured using an instrument
called a Protimeter or shall be measured in accordance with BS 8203 Appendix A or
by a Vaisala thermodygrometer type MHI 31.

[ROL]

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380J115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 69
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

The main problem with concrete floors is the weak top surface layer known as
laitance. This water-rich top layer forms durinq the drying out period and is
mechanically weak. In addition to this, the laitance has a chemical composition
different from the rest of the concrete. These properties obviously provide a poor
surface to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a precondition that all laitance be
removed prior to coating applications.

2. Surface Preparation

In order to ensure good adhesion and the long-term protection of any floor coating,
it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The
following are the recognized method of preparation:

a. Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: The removal of chemicals, oil and
REVISIONS grease must be completed before any other preparation of work commences,
such as acid etching, blasting, etc. Concrete that has become contaminated
PREPARED BY; ROL
---:="---1 by chemicals must be neutralized before coating. If the surface is acidic, it
DATE:
must be neutralized with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with
CRK'D BY: clean/fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline, it can be cleaned with
detergent and steam. Oil and grease can be removed using a combination of
solvents, steam and/or detergents, depending on the severity of the
contamination.

tal
CIPRIANO S. MAURlCIO
b. Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the first
choice for heavy duty flooring systems, if conditions allow. The blast is
,."....... normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast or Auto-
Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the
principle of propelling small particles of abrasive, i.e., steel shot/grit, against
the floor surface while at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and the
OI'DlATlNG DEPARTMENT
abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing
any laitance, blasting will leave the surface of the floor with a profile, which will
enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical bond to the
substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large areas.

c. Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling), involves the use of rotting wheels

and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is
pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It
is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine, and can, in the
DATE: 2:01Uli-06
wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on
small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out.

d. Power grinding: Similar to scarifying, this method can be used to open up

holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
concrete and precast slabs. It is slower than blasting but could be considered
CONSTRUCTION
FOR
OR
ORDERING
for small external floor areas.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
e. Wire brushing: Can be used to remove loose material from the surface and
open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either power or hand
wire brushing; with the power wire brushing giving increased productivity.

[ROLl

f. Impact tools: Poured concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools
such as Needle Guns, etc. This method is slow however, and should only be
considered for small areas. Granulating or hammering machines work quicker
but should only be used if flooring screeds are to be applied.

Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on
the principle of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy
for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore
great care should be taken when using this method of preparation.

g. Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on
concrete floors. It is carried out to remove laitance, but will not remove old
paint or oil and grease, and should only be used in areas where sufficient
drainage exists to allow the water and acid solutions to be easily removed. To
REVISIONS carry out acid etching, the following procedures should be followed:

PREl"ARED BY: ---===---I

ROL i. Before commencing acid etching, the concrete surface should be cleaned
DATE: for all loose concrete.
CHK'PBY;
ii. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed using an alkaline cleaner
or by steam cleaning.

iii. Thoroughly dampen the floor with water.

aa/
CIPRIANO S. MAURIOO
iv. Sprinkle uniformly over the floor an 8-10% solution of phosphoric acid in
water. The approximate spreading rate is 1.5 m2 to 1-liter solution.
201'""""

v. The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2-4 minutes and then
rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water
OPERATING DEPARTMENT hose and sweeping brush.

vi. It is important that the rinsing operation is carried out immediately to

prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to
remove.

~@
vii. The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and
should have a pH of 7 or greater.
BY:
viii. Depending on the concrete type, more than one operation may be
DATE; ZOl~

required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile.

ix. Thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each etches
application. The surface profile should be similar to fine sandpaper.
TlUS BRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
x. The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating.
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATDUALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
3.33 ROOF DRAINS

Roof drains shall be 200mm in diameter, galvanized cast iron body with combination
flashing clamp and gravel stop. The dome shall be made of bronze, brass or aluminum
with low profile. Roof drains shall have the following features:
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDERNO. 380J115kV BSP APPENDIX·Vlllb 71
T448 A PTS-11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
;
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITYCOMPANY ,,4JfS!l ~J".....J\ J.s~1
"a-e
~

"&l
is a. Under deck clamp & secondary flashing clamp
b. 100mm high stainless steel perforated extension
c. Sump receiver
d. Bronze or stainless steel mesh screen over dome
z e. Vandal proof secured top
c
§ f. Vertical expansion joint
15 g. 50mm high external water dam
~

'"" h. Threaded outlet

i. 100mm speedy-set outlet

3.34 WATER TANK

0 ~ N ~
z;

REVISIONS If required, the water tank shall be as per TES-P-119.19 and the following shall be
considered:
PREPARED BY: ROL

DATE: 101~1o
a. The method of fixing the tank to the roof slab shall be specified to resist high wind
CHK'DBY:
.~ forces.
',/

b. Overflow pipe shall be connected to drain pipe of the tank. Overflow pipe shall be
Am!2YIlIl brought from the roof slab to the splash block near the sidewalk.

CtII/
CIPRIANO s, MAVRICIO
3.35 JOINT SEALANTS

"'....... A. Polysulphide

Low-modulus pitch polysulphide joint sealant shall be multi-component pitch extended

OPERATING DEPARTMDIT polysulphide based joint sealant, which cures to form a low-modulus durable and elastic
seal. The sealant shall have the following properties:

1. Low Modulus, high resilient and high performance

2. Excellent flexibility and movement tolerance
3. Elastomeric

~r-i~
4. Non-sag, non-staining, non-bleeding
(f/,H
BY;
5.
6.
Prolonged life due to high age hardening resistance
Resistant to penetration of stones and hard debris
DATE: :ZOlz.o6.8(j 7. Chemical curing and self-leveling type
8. It shall posses high tensile strength.
9. Curing time shall be as minimum as possible.
10. It shall effectively seal against the infiltration of water, sand and dirt.
11. Resistant to spillage of most diluted acids, alkalis and chemical solutions. Also
nus DRAWING IS NOT resistant to petroleum based fuels, synthetic oils and vegetable oils plus many
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR solvents.
FOR
MATEIlJAlS
ORDERING
UNI1L
12. Resistant to deterioration due to weathering, UV light, ozone and attack by
CERTIFIED AND DATED chemicals present

Properties Typical Values Standards

Hardness Shore A Range 15 to 50
Elonaation Aoorox, 500% ASTM D412
[ROLl
STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 72
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii I'~~~~~~~I
tl SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~

~
Tensile Strencth 0.55 MPa ASTM 0314
~ Pot-life 2 hours at 25°C
Cure time 24 hours at 25°C
Service temperature range -40°C to 82°C
Movement accommodation ±25'1'0
z
0 factor

~
Specific aravitv Approximately 1.5
~ Consistency Gun-arade
'"
0
Color Cement Gray
Resistance to ozone Non-crack
Viscosity Thixotropic paste
Solid content Greater than 99%
~ ~ . - Sealant shall conform to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, T, P, G, Class 25
REVISIONS standards Federal Standard TI-S-0227 E Type II, Class A,
BS 4254 & BS 5212, Type F
PllEPAKEDBY; ROL

DATE: 201~"
Joint Design: For optimum performance, joints shall be designed for not more than 50%
CHK'DBY: --:J.J..'t; extension and 25% compression. No joint shall be less than 6mm wide. In joints up to
'_~f 12mm wide, the depth shall be calculated using the folloWing formula:

~
Depth in mm = Joint width in mm + 6mm, Sealant depth shall never exceed joint width.
3
aa/
CIPRIANO s. MAmuao
Minimum width of joint shall be four (4) times the anticipated movement.

,.. ,......;
All movement joints subject to trafficking shall be recessed 5mm below flush so that
durinq joint contraction, the sealant does not protrude above the surface.

Joint Backing: Joint filler material shall be extruded closed cell polyethylene foam rod or
OPEllATlNG DEPARTMENT
polyurethane foam rod. Joint filler shall be of suitable sizes and shapes so that when
compressed (25 to 50%) it shall fit in the joints as required,

Priming: The correct priming must always be used. Sealant shall not be applied without
compressible filler board and bond breaker strip.

'A~:If'u:2 Preparation
~v/,- ..J.~.
BY:
1. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
DATE: f ZOlz.4l6-06
Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter, which might impair adhesion
of sealant.
2. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
3. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealant to perform properly.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR Installation
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
1. Perform WORK in accordance with ASTM C790 and ASTM C804.
2. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Joints shall be free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags.
4. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGENO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 73
T44B A PTS·11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii 1't.,..)fS.ll ~~ ~.;JJI
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
~
~

" B. Silicone Rubber Sealant

'"
1i
Silicone rubber sealant shall be used to seal around tubs, sinks, urinals and for sealing
fixtures in toilet and battery room.

z
0

~
3.36 CONCRETE BONDING AGENT

..'"
~

The bonding agent shall be solvent-free epoxy resin, two components, containing
pigments and fine fillers. It is used for structural bonding of new concrete to existing
concrete. The bonding agent shall be able to provide a bond of far greater strength than
the tensile strength of the concrete itself.
~ '"
N ~

The bonding agent shall have the following properties:

REVISIONS

I'REI'ARIW BY: ROL

a. It can be applied to dry or damp substrate.
b. Special 'slow-set' version available allowing time to erect steel reinforcement and
DATE: %D'UJ6,06
formwork
CRK'DBY: """"1.A\.. c. Solvent-free can be used in enclosed locations.
\J~f-'
d. Workable at low temperatures
~ e. Unaffected by moisture

(jJJ/ Properties Standards

CIPRIANO s.MAURIOO Compressive strength 60-70 MPa
Shear strenath 30 MPa
'01...... Flexural strenath 30-35 MPa
Bond strenqth to concrete 2.5-3 MPa
Bond strenqth to steel 18-20 MPa
OPERATING DEPARTMDIT Tensile strenath 18-20 MPa
Densitv Approx. 1.4 kQ/liter
Color Dove Gray
Pot life 5 to 7 hours
Initial Hardness 48 hours
I Full cure 7 days

A~
,v..l.l..:,t:' AU< ...
Standards: ASTM C881 & BS 6319
BY: Surface Preparation
""......
/
DATE:

Clean all surfaces and remove any dust, unsound material, plaster, oil, paint, grease,
corrosion deposits or algae. Roughen the surfaces, remove any laitance and expose
aggregate by light scabbling or grit blasting.

TInS DRAWING IS NOT Oil and grease deposits should be removed by steam cleaning, detergent scrubbing or by
TO BE USED FOR
CDNSTRUcnON OR the use of a proprietary degreaser.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Application

After missing, apply directly to the prepared substrate by brush, roller or spray. On damp
surfaces, ensure that it is well brushed in. Pour new concrete within specified open time,
as long as material is still tacky.
[ROLl

3.37 HANDRAILS

Handrails shall be as per Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. Handrails shall be constructed of
materials, which are smooth and free of mill scales, roll marks and pitting. Pipes
complying with ASTM A120, Schedule 40, shall be used. Minimum diameter of pipe shall
be 50mm. Maximum spacing of posts shall be 1.8 meters. Angles, offsets, and other
changes in alignment of railings shall be made with accurately mitered joints or welded
railing fittings.

Welding shall be done with fillets dressed to uniform radius; excess metal removed, and
welds ground smooth and flush. Welded joints shall be of flush type. Members shall be
neatly coped and continuously welded at junctions of posts and rails. Flattening of the rail
REVISIONS
or post ends at junctions of posts and rails shall not be permitted.
PREPARED BY: ---'::="'--1
ROL
Steel handrails shall be galvanized after fabrication. Prior to galvanizing, fabrication
DAlE:
section shall have internal openings so that there are no closed or blind sections of pipe.
CHK'D BY:

Handrails shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386, Class A or B, with
2
minimum zinc coating thickness of 610g/m followed by approved method of surface
preparation under ASTM 02092 for painting. Handrails shall be painted with zinc yellow
()/J/ epoxy enamel paint.
CIPRIANO S. MAVlUCIO

When assembled, posts shall be vertical and longitudinal members shall be parallel with
'01....... each or other supporting members. The top rails shall run continuous over the posts, and
the posts shall be continuous through lower rail or rails.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT
Handrail Pipes shall be bonded to the substation grounding.

3.38 RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM

Access flooring shall be portable assembly of modular floor panels on an elevated support
system (under structure) forming a complete under floor cavity to accommodate electrical
cables/communication cables. Panels shall be gravity held with bolted stringers under
structure system. Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR
DATE: 2812-06-06
to provide sufficient space for routing cables to the associated equipment, but not be less
than 900mm.

Access flooring shall comply with all the test requirements in accordance with "Ceiling and
Interior System Construction Association", Recommended Test Procedures for Access
nus DRAWING IS NOT
Floors", "CISCAlAF".
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING Access floor system shall consist of the Floor Panels, Floor covering, Understructure.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
Floor Panels shall have the following properties:

I Panel thickness I 33mm I

I Standard Module I 600 x 600mm I
[ROLl

~
"i<is Concentrated load 3000 - 5000N
Distributed load Maximum 30,000 N/m2
7
Electrical conductivity Less than 10 Ohms
Thermal conductivity Approximately 1.25 W/m'-oK
Fire rating Minimum 3 hours
s Floor Panels: Including those with cutouts capable of supporting concentrated design

~
loads of 1000 Ibs. magnitude with a top surface deflection under load and as
permanent set not to exceed 2mm and 0.25mm respectively
"'
~ The panel shall be all steel panel system with steel minimum thickness 1mm, welded
steel construction and filled with a non-combustible synthetic anhydrite.
Lightweight for ease in handling. Approximate weight shall not exceed 18 kg.

0
z ~ N N Floor covering shall have the following properties:
REVISIONS
Nominal minimum thickness I 3.2mm
PREPARED BY: ROL Nominal size I 610mm x 610mm
Floor covering shall have cleanliness, ease of maintenance, long and high wear, dust
DATE: 201'-"'-'"

CRK'DDY: ""A.,"\c free environment and rigid.

'.YY
Conductive flooring for control of static electricity
MlIl2YII!
Washable surface
oe/
CIPRIANO s, MAURlCIO
Edge Condition or Trim: Integral trim eliminates any potential separation of edge trim
with the panel. Edge trim is mechanically attached to as perimeter of each panel.
'012-<J<.1<
Edging will be interlocked with top sheet and captured by up tumed edge of bottom
steel sheet. Edge trim shall protect the panel and covering against mechanical
damage and humidity.
OI'KRATING DU'ARTMENT Floor covering shall be conductive grade and factory applied high-pressure laminate
(HPL) with the following specifications. The laminate should be bonded using
professional fabricating technique and procedure. Adhesive shall also be conductive.

Conductive laminate flooring shall be properly grounded by utilizing a variety of

terminals and grounded cords property attached to the laminate and a suitable earth

.s:«
BY:

OAn,
M

P
",':At' I.:L
--7

wU
-r"7
ground.

Understructure: The understructure shall be bolted stringer system.

pedestal assembly and stringer system.
It consists of

Pedestal Assembly: - Includes base, column with Galvanized and yellow

provision for height adjustment and head cap made passivated steel
either of steel or aluminum or aluminum or a combination construction
THIS DRAWING IS NOT of both.
TO BE usn FOR
CONSTRUCI1ON OR Pedestal Assembly shall provide vibration proof mechanism for making and holding
FOR ORDERING
MATDUALS UNTIL fine adjustments in height for leveling purposes over a range of not less than 2 in.
CERTIFIED AND DATED
include means of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height, which requires
deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibratory displacement.
Fixing of pedestal to sub floor Dowelling
Axial load without as permanent deformation as per 3630 kg
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM·2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP
APPENDIX-V111b 76
1448 A PT5-11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY 1>4.)fSll ~~.".......Jl ;.s~l

~
~
pedestal without panels or other supports
i5 Overturning moment without as permanent deformation 113 Nm
as per pedestal without panels or other supports
Pedestal head to accept bolted stringer
Pedestal adiustinq rod of minimum 22mm solid steel threaded stud
~

~..
~
Pedestal Head
Die formed galvanized pedestal head and projection welded stud with adjustment nut.
" Head and installed stringers shall provide full as perimeter edge support.
Stringers to be attached with 1/4" - 20 flat head screws
Pedestal head shall be tapped for engagement of stringer screws.
Gantry lock collar to provide anti-vibration displacement
.,;
z
.., . - Vibration proof leveling nut shall be 22mm.
REVISIONS Pedestal head shall have gasket for fixing of panels and sound insulation and
electrical conductivity.
PllEPAREDBY: ROL Perimeter pedestals shall provide support for panels around columns at walls, and
provide details for complete information.
DATE: '01,a
CBK'DBY: -;:",~:' V
- ~
Gasket
Conductive synthetic
APl"ROVED
Electrical resistance Approximately 104
Gasket shall serve as a high freauencv safetv
CUI/
CIFJUANO s, MAURICIO
Pedestal Base
2&ll-06-O6 Base to be at least 400mm" and hot-dip galvanized steel.
Pedestal tube shall be 25mm diameter, galvanized tubing.

OPERA11NG DEI'ARl'MENT Stringers

Stringers shall be used with floor height of greater than 500mm.
Heaw-dutv roll formed, steel stringer shall withstand 450 Ibs. mid span load.
Hot-dip galvanized stringer construction to prevent corrosion
Stringer shall have factory applied conductive gasket to provide quiet sound absorbing
seal.

~1!t~
DATE:
,
,.,.......
Accessories
Cutouts Fabricate cutouts in floor panels to accommodate cable penetrations
and source outlets, comply with requirements indicated for size,
shape, number and locations. Provide reinforcement or additional
support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard
as performance requirements.
Ramps Manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope
THIS BRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR indicated, but not steeper than 1 in 12, with non-slip raised disc
CONSTRUcnON OR rubber or vinyl floor covering and of same materials, as performance
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL and construction requirements as the access f1oorina.
CERTIFIED ANDDATED
Steps Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor covering
to match access flooring. Apply non-slip aluminum nosing to treads
unless otherwise noted.
Railings Manufacturer's standard stain finish extruded aluminum post and rail
[ROLl

" system at ramps and open sided as perimeter of access flooring

'"
is where indicated, including handrail, intermediate rails, posts,
brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates and
anchorages where required. Provide railing that complies with
structural as performance requirements for railing.
Panel Lifting Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device at least two (2) single
;
z;

Device and double suction cup type.

~
Vertical When under floor cavity is not enclosed by abutting walls, columns,
"'" Closures beams or downward slabs, provide manufacturer's standard plates
(Fascia) with factorv-anolled finish.
Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or where size of
cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trip edge of cutouts with
manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. Furnish removable
c;;
'" '" " - covers for arommets.
REVISIONS
Provide foam rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables and
PREPARED BY: 80L
trim edge of cutout with molding having flange and edge for capturing and supporting
pads.
DATE: 201~
CBK'DBY:
1,)&,
.~ Loads
Ultimate Ultimate concentrated load shall be not less than the value
AmI2YII! Concentrated Load obtained from multiplying the factor indicated below by the
without Failure specified concentrated design load on floor panels. Failure is
aa/
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO
defined as the point at which access- flooring system will not
take any additional load.
Factor: 3.0
,~

Design Concentrated Load: 5000 N

Ultimate Uniform Ultimate Uniform Loads without Failure: Ultimate uniform load
Loads without Failure shall be not less than the value obtained from multiplying the
OPERATING DEPARTMENT factor indicated below by the specified uniform design load on
floor panels. Failure is defined as the point at which access-
flooring system will not take any additional load.
Factor: 3.0
Design Uniform Load: 25,000 N/m2
Rolling loads Rolling loads as noted below applied to panels through
CISCAIAF wheel with combination of local and overall
BY,!2?dl
DATE:....... ,."
deformation not to exceed 1mm measured across panels
610mm span and permanent set not to exceed 1mm after
exposure to rolling load as per CISCAIAF path A or B
whichever path produces the greatest top surface
deformation.
10 Passes of Wheel Load for path A: 1,000 Ibs
10,000 Passes of Wheel Load for path B: 1,000 Ibs
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO DE USED FOR Impact Load: A load shall be dropped 915mm into an inch square indenter, there shall
CONSTRUcnON OR
FOR ORDERING
be no system failure -150 Ibs.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFJEDAND DATED
Other requirements
Electrical Resistance of Systems: Provide access-flooring system with the follOWing
electrical resistance characteristics: Less than 1 ohm measured across surface of
bare panel to under structure by test method as specified in NFPA 99.
[ROLl

~
Q
~
is Installation
Install access floor system and accessories under supervision of the access flooring
manufacturer's authorized representative to ensure rigid, firm installation free of
vibration, rockinq, rattle, scueaks and other unacceptable performance.
z Set pedestals in adhesives to provide full bearing of the pedestal base on the sub-

~
'"
~
floor.
Layout floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter
to a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no
voids qreater than 3.2mm where panels abut vertical surfaces.
Secure grid members to pedestal heads in accordance with access floor
manufacturer's instructions.
z0 ~ N
- Thoroughly clean up dust, dirt and construction debris caused by floor installations
including vacuuming the sub-floor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
REVISIONS
Extend cleaning under installed panel as far as possible.
l'REI'ARED BY: ROL Cutting and trimming of other dirt or debris producing operations will not be permitted
in the rooms where the floor is being installed.
DATE: ZG1~,
--:4..:1:. Level installed access floor to within 1.5mm of true level over the entire area and
CHK'DBY:
UJJ within 2.5mm at any 3m distances.

~ Submittals: Submit the following:

CQ{/ a. Product data for each type of access flooring

CIPRIANO s. MAUlUCIO
b. Shop drawings indicating complete layout of access flooring based on the field
201""" verified dimensions, including details with descriptive notes indicating materials,
finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, under structure
and other data to permit a full evaluation of the entire access flooring system.
OPERA11NG DUAJtTMENT
c. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer charts consisting
of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures and pattems
available for each type of floor covering and exposed finish indicated.

d. Samples for verification purposes in full size units of each type of floor covering and

~ fi~~
exposed finish indicated.
7?
r"" 'a Quality Assurance
BY; "77
I
DATE: 201J<;;;;
a. Engage an experience installer that is approved by the access-flooring
manufacturer for installation of the types of access flooring required for this
PROJECT.

b. Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE usm FOR
OR
CONSTRUCI'ION
FOR ORDERING
c. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access flooring from a single manufacturer.
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
d. Coordinate location of electrical WORK in under floor cavity to prevent interference
with access flooring pedestals.

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/115kVaSp APPENDIX-Vlllb 79
T448 A PTS·11 EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY

e. Access floor system shall be guaranteed by a quality management system

according to ISO 9001.

f. Environmental Condition: Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until

installation area is enclosed and has an ambient temperature of between 55°F and
90°F and a relative humidity of not more than 70%.

I g.

h.
Deliver access-flooring components in original unopened packages, clearly labeled
with manufacturer's name and item description.

Handle and store packages containing access flooring in a manner that avoids
overloading the bUilding.

i. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after substantial completion
REVISIONS
of other performable construction within affected spaces.
PREPAREDBY: ROL

DATE:
3.39 FIRE-STOP AND SMOKE-STOP PRODUCTS
CHK'DBY:

A. General

1. This section describes the specifications of fire-stops and smoke-stops for all fire-
rated walls and floor assemblies accommodating penetrating items such as cables,
au!
CIPRIANO S. MAURIOO conduits, pipes, ducts, cable trays, etc., but not limited to the following:

a. Through-Penetrations: Fire-stopping shall be installed in all open penetrations

and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non-bearing fire
rated barrier.
OPEllA11NG DEPARTMENT
b. Construction Joints/Gaps: Fire-stopping shall be provided
c. Between the joints of floor slabs and exterior walls
d. Between the tops of walls and the underside of floors
e. In control joints of masonry walls and floors
f. In expansion joints

2. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of fire-stop and smoke-stop
1/--< J;;';'W>Ai material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses,
'(lf~'tl._ ':'."ff. .Z 1 as performance and limitation criteria, and test data.
BY:

,.".......
V
DATE:
3. Fire stopping system (material and design): Shall conform to both Flame (F) and
Temperature (T) ratings as required by agencies ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests
in a configuration that is representative of field conditions.

The F rating must be minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance
TIllS DRAWING ]8 NOT
TO BE USED FOR rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The
MATERIALS UNI1L
CERTIFIED AND DATED fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01
inch of water column.

For joints, must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal to those of
the anticipated conditions.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 380/11SkV BSP APPENDIX-Vlllb 80
T448 A PTS·11EN367 OF o
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
Ii "4JfSll ~J~ 'ls..;.JJI
tl SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
Q
~
~

~
is 4. Fire stopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through
openings created by 1) burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or
pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion
(electrical & mechanical duct work).

I..
~

Cl
5. Fire-stopping materials shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate or
require the use of hazardous solvents.

6. Fire-stopping sealant must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement.

7. Fire stopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidence by cracking or
pulling back from contact surfaces.
g ... H ~

REVISIONS 8. Fire-stopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water
after curing.
PREPARED BY: IlOL

9. A contractor trained or approved by the fire-stop and smoke-stop manufacturer shall

DATE: 'OI~ perform installation of fire-stopping systems.
CHK'DBY: "1".!:2-<-
<~.Y

10. All the fire-stop and smoke-stop products and systems shall be designed and
~ installed so that the basic sealing system will allow the full restoration of the thermal
and fire resistance properties of the barrier being penetrated with minimal repair if
euV
CIPRIANO s. MAURI[JQ
penetrants are subsequently removed.

Materials SDecifications
201~
Intumescent The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, two stage intumescent
Fire-stop and latex compound. The sealant when exposed to high heat or flame
Smoke-stop shall be capable of expanding a minimum of eight (8) times. Range of
OPERATING DEPARTMENT Sealant and continuing expansion shall be from 230°F to >1000°F. The sealant
Caulks shall be thixotropic and shall be capable of caulking or toweling on to
vertical surfaces or overhead. The sealant shall be UL Classified
and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM
E814 (UL 1479).
Latex Fire- The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, latex-based compound.
stop Sealant The sealant shall dry to form a flexible non-shrinking penetration seal
!(olfid , v
and shall be capable of allowing pipe movement and shall contain no
solvents, water-soluble fillers, or inorganic fibers. The sealant shall be
DATE: 20'...... thixotropic and shall be capable of caulking or toweling on to vertical
surfaces or overhead. The sealant shall be UL Classified and/or FM
Systems approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL
1479).
Elastomeric The fire-stopping sealant shall be one-part, neutral curing silicone
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
Water-Based sealant. The sealant shall be completely water-resistant and shall
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
Sealant contain no solvents or inorganic fibers of any kind. The through-
MATERIALS UNTIL penetration fire-stop and smoke-stop sealant shall allow movement of
CERTIFIEDANDDATED
+25% and shall be UL Classified and/or FM Systems Approved and
tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479). The fire-stop
joint sealant shall allow movement up to 50% and shall be UL
Classified and tested to the requirements of UL 2079.
[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENTNO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDEil NO. 380/115kV BSP
APPENDIX·Vlllb 81
T448 A PTS-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
~ ,.4JfS.11 J.;~"...,Jl ~~j
~ SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY
e
~

~ Silicone Fire- The fire-stopping putty shall be a one-part, two-stage intumescent,

0 stop Sealant non-hardening compound. The putty, when exposed to high heat or
and Caulks flame shall be capable of expanding a minimum of five (5) times.
Range of continuing expansion shall be from 230°F to 1000°F. The
putty shall be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall not
~
contain any water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty shall be

~
UL Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the
~
requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
'"'
Q
Fire-stop The fire-stopping putty shall be one-part, two stage intumescent, non-
Putty & Pads hardening compound. The putty when exposed to high heat or flame
shall be capable of expanding a minimum of 5 times. Range of
continuing expansion shall be from 230°F to > 1000°F. The putty shall
c::i
z ~ N
- be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall not contain any
water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty shall be UL
REVISIONS
Classified and/or FM Systems approved and tested to the
PR.EPARIDBVl ROL
requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479),
Fire-stop The fire-stop system shall be factory assembled fire-stop collar
~
DATE:
Collars utilizing a molded two stage, flexible intumescent insert. The
CHK'DBV: "::1.1i&"
.~
intumescent insert shall provide a minimum 15 times free expansion
and shall contain no water-soluble expansion ingredients. The
~ specified material shall be approved for a wide range of applications
including PVC, CPVC, ABS, ABC Foam Core, and FRPP pipes when
{D/ used by itself or in combination with other products from the same
CIPRIANO s.MAURICIO manufacturer. The collar shall be UL Classified and or FM approved
and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
lO12-06-G6
Wrap Strips The wrap strip material shall be a highly flexible, two-stage
intumescent material. The wrap strip shall provide a minimum of 15
times free expansion and shall contain no water-soluble expansion
OPERATING DEPARTMENT ingredients. The specified material shall be approved for a wide range
of applications including combustible and non-combustible penetrants
when used by itself or in combination with other products from the
same manufacturer. The wrap strip shall be UL Classified and or FM
approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Two Parts The fire-stopping product shall be a two-part, silicone, room

~;P;;:l
Silicone Fire- temperature curing foam. The foam shall be completely water-
stop Foam resistant and shall contain neither solvents nor inorganic fibers of any
BY: kind. The through-penetrations fire-stop shall be UL Classified and/or
DATE:
f 2OI,..,J{ FM Systems approved & tested to the requirements of ASTM E814
(UL 1479),
Fire-stop The fire-stopping material shall be a lightweight; fast drying Portland
Mortar cement based material. The density of the wet mortar shall be :'>45
Ib/cu. ft. The specified mortar shall be approved for a wide range of
TIllS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR applications including combustible and non-combustible penetrants
CONSTRUcnON
FOR
OR
ORDERING
when used by itself or in combination with other products from the
MATERIALS UNTIL same manufacturer. The fire-stop mortar shall be UL Classified and or
CERTIFIED AND DATED
FM approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL
1479):
Fire-stop The fire-stopping system shall utilize an intumescent pillow heat-
Pillows sealed in a fire-retardant poly bag. The fire-stop pillow shall consist of
[ROLl

$
a monolithic (one-piece) core that is encapsulated on all sides by a
~ flexible intumescent coating and shall not contain any loose fiberfill.
The pillow shall be UL Classified and or FM approved and tested to
the reauirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
Elastomeric The fire protective joint coating shall be water-based, non-halogenated
z Spray elastomeric coating and shall contain no solvents, inorganic fibers, nor
;
en
asbestos. The coating shall dry to form a flexible, moisture resistant
film and shall adhere to all common construction surfaces. The
"'" coating shall be thixotropic and shall be capable of being applied by
brush or trowel application or by airless spray. The approved coating
shall be UL Classified and or FM approved and tested to the
requirements of ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
0 ~ N ~
Cable The fire protective cable coating shall be a water-based intumescent
z:
Coating coating capable of expanding up to five times its dry applied thickness.
REVISIONS
The coating shall dry to from a flexible, water and weather-resistant
PREPARID BY: ROL
film and shall contain no solvents, asbestos, or inorganic fibers. The
, , coating shall be thixotropic and shall be capable of being applied by
DATE: '01141.1." brush application or by airless spray. The coating shall be FM systems
CHK'DB'J': ~ approved and tested.
,~-""

Accessories Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other types as per

~ manufacturer's recommendation.

tW
CIPRIANOs. MAURICIO
3.40 COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAYS

'01...... CONTRACTOR shall install dedicated cable trays (aluminum) to route optical fiber cables
from cable pull box up to fiber optic terminal equipment inside the communication room.
The communication cable trays shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

3.41 ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAYS

The aluminum cable trays galvanized steel supports and necessary accessories for
routing all the power and control cables inside the substation shall be per 24-TMSS-01.
Md~.J
t{J1 ':7r.
BY:
'z: The electrical cable trays shall be as per the requirements of TES-P-119.19.
DAn: j/ 101:'u

3.42 CERAMIC TILES

A. Wall and Floor Tiles for Toilets

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR Floor tiles shall be unglazed, 150mm x 150mm x 9mm thick, color off-white.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Wall tiles shall be glazed, 150mm x 150mm x 7mm thick, color off-white.

B. Wall and Floor Tiles for Battery room

Floor tiles shall be unglazed, 150mm x 150mm x 9mm thick, color dove gray.
[ROLl

"
'"
Ii Wall tiles shall be glazed, 150mm x 150mm x 7mm thick, color ivory.

C. The tiles shall comply with SSA 1031, BS 6431 & ANSI with the following specifications:

z; Properties Typical Values

~ Walls Floors
~ Flatness Deviation ±0.50% ±0.50%
'"
Q
Water absorption 14%-16% 3%-6%
Coefficient of linear thermal expansion Less than 9 x 10-0 / K Less than 9 x 10-0/ K
Hardness - Mohs scale Less than 3 5 - 8
Modulus of Rupture Greater than 20 MPa Greater than 30 MPa
~ '" N
- Acid/Alkali resistance Resistant Resistant
REVISIONS
Crazing Resistance Resistant Resistant
Size Deviation ±0.50% ±0.50%
PREPARED BY: ROL Thickness Deviation +50% +50%
DATE: 2Gl~" Abrasion resistance Not required Class 2-5
CHK'DBY: ~

Internal/external angle beads, elephant feet, internal/external comers, capping, and other
tile accessorieslfittings shall be provided for complete tile installation.
~

D. Installation
W
CIPRIANO S. MAURJCIO
Ceramic tile installation shall be per TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
201"""""

3.43 DOOR/FINISH SCHEDULE AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS

OPERATING DEFARTMENT A. Door Schedule

Door schedule and details shall be in accordance with Standard Drawing TA-800023.

B. Finish Schedule

Floor, wall, ceiling and surface finishes of buildings, firewalls, cable tunnels, basements,
Jf1 r::;:.;./ etc, and miscellaneous details shall be in accordance with Standard Drawing TA-BOO024.
M~1f..~IIl. iJ AR
BY:
, v
DATE: 20''-''''''

END OF SECTION III

nus DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIEDAND DATED

[ROLl

STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA, TECHNICAL & MATERIAL PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2
JOB ORDER NO. 3801115kV BSP 84
APPENDIX-Vlllb
T448 A PT5-11EN367 OF 0
SHEDGUM SAUDI ARABIA 84
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D
DESCRIPTION

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL

PROVISIONS
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:

FOR
APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND

OPERATING DEPARTMENT
MATERIAL TESTING FOR 380kV
______________________________

______________________________
SUBSTATIONS
______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

PTS-08EM313

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
(ATTACHMENT TO SERVICE ORDER NO. ……/….)

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 1
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHK’D

SECTION – PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

I SCOPE OF WORK 5
DESCRIPTION

II TECHNICAL PROVISIONS 6

2.01 Mobilization and Demobilization 6

2.02 Schedule and Order of Work 6
2.03 Exploration/Drilling and Sampling Methods 6
NO.

1
3

A. Overburden Drilling 6
REVISIONS 1) Small Diameter Auger Drilling
2) Large Diameter Auger Drilling
PREPARED BY: TEQ 3) Rotary Drilling
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
B. Soil Sampling and Testing 7
1) Soil Classification Sampling
APPROVED 2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
3) "Undisturbed" Samples

C. Sampling of Cemented Soil, Stiff Clay and Soft Rock 9

1) Drive Samples
2) Double Tube Barrel Samples

OPERATING DEPARTMENT D. Rock Drilling and Coring 10

1) Overburden Drilling and Stabilization
2) Rock Drilling
______________________________

______________________________
3) Core Drilling
______________________________
E. Sample Containers 13
1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples
CERTIFIED
2) "Undisturbed" Samples
3) Rock Cores
BY:
MSM
DATE:
F. Care and Delivery of Samples 17
G. Freighting 17
H. Supplementary Work 17

2.04 Exploration/Open Excavation and Sampling Methods 18

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

A. Test Pits and Sampling 18
TO BE USED FOR B. Test Trenches and Sampling 20
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING C. Testing 20
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
2.05 Exploration/Cone Penetration Test Methods 20

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 2
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Con't.)

SECTION – PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

DESCRIPTION

2.06 Exploration/Geophysical Methods 20

A. Refraction Seismic Test 21

1) Equipment
2) Procedures
3) Records
4) Analyses and Reports
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS
B. Cross-Hole Seismic Testing 22
1) Objective and Principle
PREPARED BY: TEQ
2) Equipment
DATE: 18-02-2008
3) Procedures
CHK’D BY:
4) Records
5) Analyses and Reports
APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT C. Electrical Resistivity 23

2.07 Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation 23

A. Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content 23

B. Moisture Content Direct 24
OPERATING DEPARTMENT C. Plate Bearing Tests 24
D. Full Scale Spread Footing Load Tests 24
______________________________
E. Pile Load Tests 24
______________________________ 1) Compression Load Test
______________________________ 2) Tension Load Test
3) Lateral Load Test
CERTIFIED
4) Inclined Tension Load Test

F. Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests 25

BY:
MSM 1) Piezometer Installation and Observation
DATE:
2) Permeability Testing

G. Electrical Resistivity 29
H. Thermal Resistivity 29
I. Field Vane Shear Test 29
J. Pressure Meter Test 29
THIS DRAWING IS NOT K. Percolation 29
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
L. Other Consideration 29
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 2.08 Field Records 30
2.09 Laboratory Testing 31

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 3
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Con't.)

SECTION – PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

DESCRIPTION

2.10 Standards for Laboratory Testing 31

A. Visual Classification 31
B. Classification Testing 32
C. Index Properties Testing 32
D. Structural Properties Testing 33
E. Compaction Testing 34
NO.

1
3

F. Chemical Analyses 35
REVISIONS
G. Other Testing 35
PREPARED BY: TEQ
2.11 Laboratory Test Records 35
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
III GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS 36
APPROVED
3.01 General 36
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT 3.02 Density of Soils 40
3.03 Consistency of Soils 40
3.04 Cemented Overburden Materials 41
3.05 Rock 41
3.06 Field Notes and Records 42
3.07 Final Logs 42
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

IV GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 45

______________________________

______________________________ 4.01 General 45

______________________________ 4.02 Scope 45
4.03 Format 45
CERTIFIED
A. Executive Summary 45
B. Scope of Work 46
BY:
MSM C. Project Description 46
DATE:
D. Site Condition 46
E. Field Investigation 46
F. Laboratory Tests 46
G. Subsurface Conditions 47
H. Engineering Analysis 47
I. Recommendations 47
THIS DRAWING IS NOT J. Certification 48
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
K. Illustrations 48
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 4
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

SECTION I – SCOPE OF WORK

CHK’D

1.01 The CONTRACTOR (Geotechnical Consultant) shall perform all WORK in accordance
with the latest ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standards, except
where indicated otherwise in Section II, Technical Provisions; or, by such other
standards specifically authorized in the SERVICE ORDER. For tests where no
DESCRIPTION

accepted or tentative ASTM Standard exists, test procedures will be subject to

approval by the COMPANY.

1.02 The CONTRACTOR shall perform all investigations, field and laboratory tests as
required in, and prepare all reports, charts and graphs as instructed in each SERVICE
ORDER issued by the COMPANY and accepted by the CONTRACTOR. The
CONTRACTOR shall not commence any WORK prior to the execution of such
NO.

1
3

SERVICE ORDER.
REVISIONS

1.03 The CONTRACTOR shall review the proposed Scope of Work for a geotechnical
PREPARED BY: TEQ
investigation of a given PROJECT to determine if it is adequate for the level of
DATE: 18-02-2008
professional responsibility associated with presentation of conclusions and
CHK’D BY:
recommendations as outlined in Section IV – Guidelines for Geotechnical Report, of
this Specification.
APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT 1.04 The CONTRACTOR, by acceptance of a SERVICE ORDER discussed in Item No. 1.03
above, shall be obligated to provide the COMPANY with Geotechnical Report
consistent with the professional standards of skill, care and diligence associated with
high quality, international practice of geotechnical engineering.

1.05 Intermittent services are generally anticipated on all material testing projects. The
OPERATING DEPARTMENT COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE will give at least one day notice each time the
CONTRACTOR is required to visit the site for material testing. Immediately upon the
______________________________
availability of test results, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) copies to the
______________________________ COMPANY Transmission Asset Development Department/Bulk Asset Planning
______________________________ Division.

CERTIFIED
*** END OF SECTION I ***
BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 5
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

SECTION II – TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

CHK’D

2.01 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

A. Mobilization for geotechnical investigations and field load tests shall consist of the
delivery at the WORK SITE of all plant, equipment, materials and supplies to be
DESCRIPTION

furnished by the CONTRACTOR; the complete assembly in satisfactory working

order of all such plant equipment on the job; and the satisfactory storage at the
WORK SITE of all such materials and supplies.

B. Demobilization for the above shall consist of the removal from the site of all plant,
equipment, and refuse after completion of the WORK.
NO.

1
3

C. No mobilization and demobilization shall be applied to material testing jobs. Site

REVISIONS
visits shall be paid on mileage unit rates, which shall include all direct and indirect
vehicle and personnel charges.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
2.02 SCHEDULE AND ORDER OF WORK
CHK’D BY:

The schedule and order of WORK for geotechnical exploration and for field load tests
APPROVED
will be shown on the documents for each PROJECT COMPANY, whenever and in
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT whatever manner is deemed best for accomplishing the WORK.

The schedule and order of material testing WORK will depend on the size and nature of
the project. As and when required, the CONTRACTOR will be called upon intermittently
to provide material testing services.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT 2.03 EXPLORATION – DRILLING AND SAMPLING METHODS

______________________________
A. Overburden Drilling
______________________________

______________________________ 1) Small Diameter Auger Borings

CERTIFIED
The scope, apparatus, report and procedure shall be in accordance with ASTM
D1452, "Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Boring". Samples shall be
obtained for each material change in sufficient quantity to reveal the subsurface
BY:
MSM conditions and for such laboratory testing as may be required. Augering will not
DATE:
be continued below the water table when encountered.

2) Large Diameter Auger Borings

The Augering shall be performed in soil and/or decomposed rock with drilling
equipment capable of advancing a helical auger bit having a diameter equal to
THIS DRAWING IS NOT or greater than 760 mm (30 inches). Adaptors should be provided to permit soil
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
sampling with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers as described in subparagraph
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
3.B.3 of these Technical Provisions. The scope and report procedures specified
CERTIFIED AND DATED in ASTM D1452 shall apply.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 6
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

3) Rotary Drilling
CHK’D

a) Definition

Overburden rotary drilling will be any drilling made through soil overburden
or decomposed rock by drilling equipment utilizing power rotation of a
DESCRIPTION

drilling bit as circulating fluid removes cuttings from the hole.

b) Equipment and Procedure

The equipment and procedures used for overburden drilling for or with SPT
and undisturbed sampling shall be in accordance with the equipment and
methods recommended in U.S. Navy Design Manual NAVFAC DM-7.1,
NO.

1
3

entitled "Soil Mechanics" dated May 1982, except as modified hereinafter.

REVISIONS
In areas where a water table is encountered in overburden or decomposed
rock materials, or where caving of the sidewalls occurs, borings may be
PREPARED BY: TEQ
drilled by using suitable drilling mud slurry.
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
The drilling mud shall be maintained at the top of the hole during all drilling
and sampling operations. The mud slurry may consist of bentonite-water or
APPROVED
attapulgite-water mixtures as required for stabilization of the hole. Sampling
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT procedure shall be by such means as will prevent inclusions of the drilling
mud in the samples. Otherwise, the borings shall be suitably cased to
prevent collapse of the sidewalls and to permit sampling.

B. Soil Sampling and Testing

OPERATING DEPARTMENT 1) Soil Classification Samples

______________________________
Samples retrieved from augering and cuttings retrieved from rotary drilling shall
______________________________ be retained for Classification and Index properties testing. The scope of
______________________________ sampling, procedures and report shall be in accordance with ASTM D1452.
Recovery of samples is incidental to drilling and cost shall be included in the
CERTIFIED
applicable unit rates for drilling.

2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

BY:
MSM
DATE:
The scope, apparatus, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTM
D1586, "Standard Method of Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of
Soils", except as modified herein. The intent of the Standard Penetration Test is
to determine resistance, the consistency of the materials, depth at which rock
coring shall commence, and to obtain samples. SPT sampling is not considered
incidental to drilling and shall be paid by the unit rate for each penetration test.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
a) Equipment and Supplies
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Equipment shall include split barrel samples, power driven core drilling
machinery of a type or types approved by the ACOMPANY, and all other
accessories for taking samples of soil or decomposed rock. Unless

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 7
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

otherwise specified, drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type.

CHK’D

Borings may be advanced above the water table by augering or, by rotary
drilling for the full depths of boring. Supplies shall include all casing, piping,
pumps, and power necessary to accomplish the required boring and
sampling.
DESCRIPTION

b) Procedure

Standard Penetration Test (SPT) shall be taken at maximum vertical

intervals of 750 mm (2-1/2 ft) for the first 3 meters (10 ft) of depth,
measured from ground surface and at maximum intervals of 1.5 meters (5
ft) thereafter, or as otherwise directed. If it becomes apparent that gravel or
rock fragments are rendering SPT results meaningless, or if refusal is
NO.

1
3

consistently encountered, SPTs shall be discontinued. In material other

REVISIONS
than gravels, refusal shall be defined as an SPT with less than 100 mm (4
inches) penetration per 50 blows. The samples shall be placed in air-tight
PREPARED BY: TEQ
plastic bags or other containers as soon as possible after they are taken
DATE: 18-02-2008
from the hole in order that the natural moisture content of the material may
CHK’D BY:
be retained to the fullest extent.
APPROVED
3) "Undisturbed" Soil Samples
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

The scope, apparatus, procedure, preparation for shipment, and report shall be
in accordance with ASTM D1587, "Thin Walled Tube Sampling of Soils", except
as modified herein.

a) Definition
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

An undisturbed sample is a thin-walled tube sample taken in accordance

______________________________
with ASTM D1587, using piston-type samplers. Nonpiston-type or open-
______________________________ tube with ball check valve type samplers may be used only when
______________________________ authorized by the COMPANY and should be clearly indicated as such on all
logs, records and reports.
CERTIFIED
b) Equipment and Supplies
BY:
MSM Equipment shall include samplers, power-driven core drilling machinery of
DATE:
an approved type or types, and accessories for procuring undisturbed soil
samples. Drilling machinery shall be of the "hydraulic feed" type unless
otherwise specified. Supplies shall include all casing, piping, pumps and
power necessary to accomplish the required boring and sampling where
used. Drill casing shall have an inside diameter such as to allow the taking
of proper samples of the size directed by the COMPANY.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
c) Procedure
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED The thin wall sampler shall be forced down by a continuous push using the
hydraulic feed. Driving of the sampler by means of a drop hammer will not
be permitted. For tube samples containing medium stiff to very stiff clays,

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 8
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

the ends shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM

CHK’D

D1587. For tube samples containing cohesionless soil or soft clay requiring
special handling and testing, the ends of the sample tubes shall be cleaned
out to a depth of 76 mm (3 inches) and a seal provided of micro-crystalline
wax, such as Humble Oil Company Microven No, 1650, Gulf Petrowax A, or
Socony Product 2300, 2305, or equal. A metal or metal and rubber "O" ring
DESCRIPTION

type expansion disc having a diameter slightly less than the diameter of the
tube shall be inserted into the wax at 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the
soil sample. The wax plugs shall be flush with the ends of the tube and a
final seal consisting of a metal/plastic cap and/or plastic adhesive tape shall
be placed over the ends. Special sample containers will be accepted upon
approval of the COMPANY.
NO.

1
3

d) Logging and Labeling

REVISIONS

Particular care shall be taken to indicate the relative positions and the tops
PREPARED BY: TEQ
and bottoms of samples. Tubes and crates for undisturbed samples shall
DATE: 18-02-2008
be labeled "Do not Jar or Vibrate" and "Handle, haul and Ship in a
CHK’D BY:
Horizontal Position".
APPROVED
e) Disposition of Samples
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

Every precaution shall be taken to avoid damage of samples as a result of

careless handling and undue delay in shipping. Samples shall be shipped in
wooden boxes made from 16 mm (5/8-inch), or heavier, lumber and with a
capacity for holding up to six sample-containing tubes depending on
shipping weight restrictions. The sample tubes shall be well packed in wood
OPERATING DEPARTMENT shavings, foam or other equal material to protect the samples against
vibration. The CONTRACTOR shall avoid exposing sealed and crated
______________________________
samples to extremes of temperature. Samples permitted to freeze, even
______________________________ partially, shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his expense.
______________________________ Undisturbed samples shall not remain on the site of sampling for more than
one (1) week before being freighted for testing. Samples shall be hauled
CERTIFIED
and freighted with the tube in a horizontal position in order to prevent
consolidation and segregation of water content.
BY:
MSM C. Sampling of Cemented Soil, Stiff Clay and Soft Rock
DATE:

1) Drive Samplers

"California" type drive samplers having segmented brass liners may be used for
sampling cemented soil or stiff clays, provided that no significant disturbance of
the natural materials occurs during sampling, including alteration of natural soil
THIS DRAWING IS NOT structure, density and/or shear strength. The sampler will be driven in
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
accordance with ASTM D1586 equipment and procedures; and an appropriate
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
correlation of blow count with "N" values obtained by SPT procedures will be
CERTIFIED AND DATED provided by the CONTRACTOR. The individual segments of the liner will be
removed from the outer split-tube after sampling, the natural materials exposed
at the ends visually classified, and the liner segment capped, sealed and

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 9
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

labeled. No attempt shall be made to eject the sample from the liner segment in
CHK’D

the field. Disposition of samples will be done in accordance with the procedures
specified below for Double Tube Barrel Samplers. Care, handling and delivery
of samples will be done in accordance to the requirements of Clauses 3.E, 3.F
and 2.03.G of this Technical Specification.
DESCRIPTION

2) Double Tube Barrel Samplers shall be used for hard clays, cemented coarse
grained soils, chalk and soft or weathered rock, which cannot be recovered
intact by drive sampling or penetrated with thin-wall Shelby tube samplers.

a) Definition

A Double Tube Barrel Sample shall be a sample recovered with either a

NO.

1
3

Denison double tube core sampler or a Pitcher sampler having a protruding

REVISIONS
inner barrel or liner tube.
PREPARED BY: TEQ
b) Equipment and Supplies
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
Sampling equipment will include either Denison or Pitcher samplers. Liners
shall be of 29 gauge steel with inner lacquered surface or equal. The length
APPROVED
of protrusion of the inner barrel or liner, and the type of bit used on the outer
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT barrel shall be appropriate to the type of material being sampled and will be
subject to approval by the COMPANY.

The maximum recovery of unpredictable soft rock or friable materials is the

primary purpose for use of this type of sampling equipment. Accessory
equipment and core drilling machinery will be as specified in subparagraph
OPERATING DEPARTMENT 3.D.3.a of this Technical Specification.

______________________________
c) Procedure
______________________________

______________________________ The sampling operation shall be advanced by continuous rotation of the outer
cutting barrel in conjunction with the circulation of the drilling fluid. Down
CERTIFIED
pressure on the hydraulic feed and drilling fluid flow should be adequate for
continuous smooth penetration of the sampler without undercutting the
protruding edge of the inner barrel. Blockages of circulation or sudden
BY:
MSM changes in speed of advancement of the sampler are sufficient cause to
DATE:
terminate the sampling core run to avoid possible loss or damage of the
sample. The natural materials exposed in the ends of the inner tube shall be
visually classified immediately following recovery of the sample. Samples,
which appear to be suitable for laboratory testing shall be capped, sealed,
labeled and treated as "Undisturbed Samples". Samples, which appear to be
suitable only for laboratory classification tests may be ejected in the field and
THIS DRAWING IS NOT treated as "Soil Classification Samples".
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
D. Rock Drilling and Coring
CERTIFIED AND DATED

1) Overburden Drilling and Stabilization

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 10
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

Where sampling of the overburden is limited to recovery of soil classification

CHK’D

samples, the CONTRACTOR may employ any method and equipment for
drilling through the overburden that will permit rock and/or core drilling from the
rock surface downward in accordance with these specifications. The overburden
may be stabilized by use of casing or a mud slurry drilling fluid but, in either
procedure, stabilization methods must be adequate to prevent caving of the
DESCRIPTION

overburden.

A Standard Penetration Test with less than 50 mm (2 inches) penetration with

50 blows shall be used to determine top of rock.

2) Rock Drilling
NO.

1
3

Where recovery of rock cores is not required, the COMPANY may require the
REVISIONS
CONTRACTOR to drill and log the condition of the rock. Where recovery of rock
cores is required, the CONTRACTOR may elect to ream and clean the core
PREPARED BY: TEQ
hole to the bottom of the last core run prior to attempting the next core run. In
DATE: 18-02-2008
either instance, the CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for the depth of rock
CHK’D BY:
drilling measured from the top of rock (as defined in subparagraph 3.D.1 above)
to the bottom of boring. Repeated reaming and/or cleaning within this depth will
APPROVED
not be a separate pay item. Rock drilling may be done with a tricone bit, other
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT rock bits, or with the core barrel.

3) Core Drilling

Scope, equipment, procedure, and report shall be in accordance with ASTM

D2113, "Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation", except as modified
OPERATING DEPARTMENT herein. All core drilling shall be performed with NW size barrels and bits or with
larger sizes subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Coring shall not be
______________________________
performed in soft, friable rocks or cemented soils, which can be more suitably
______________________________ sampled with the equipment, methods and procedures described in
______________________________ subparagraph 3.C. Recovery of representative rock cores is the primary
purpose for undertaking rock coring and, the CONTRACTOR will be paid only
CERTIFIED
for the actual length of rock core recovered. Payment for core recovery shall be
in addition to the payment for rock drilling within the same depth. Equipment and
procedures shall be as described below, unless directed otherwise by the
BY:
MSM COMPANY.
DATE:

a) Equipment and Supplies

Equipment for core drilling shall include diamond core drilling machinery of
a type or types approved by the COMPANY complete with all accessories
for taking continuous rock cores of consolidated or semi consolidated
THIS DRAWING IS NOT material of a diameter consistent with bit size to the depths specified.
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Machines shall be equipped with hydraulic feed head. The use of screw or
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
fixed speed feed heads will not be permitted. The core drilling equipment
CERTIFIED AND DATED shall conform to NW core drilling equipment, equal or better than Sprague-
Henwood (Model 40CL). The core drilling machine shall be able to develop
a bit speed of at least 1200 rpm and the hydraulic system shall be able to

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 11
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

develop at least 2760 kPa (400 psi) down pressure. The drill rods (NW)
CHK’D

shall be the same size as the core barrel (NW) and the drill head shall be
able to swivel 360 degrees. Since the maximum recovery of unpredictable
soft or friable rock is of prime importance, the CONTRACTOR shall use a
standard ball-bearing, swivel-type, double-tube core barrel equipped with
diamond set core bits and standard core lifters similar in construction and
DESCRIPTION

equal in performance to Sprague and Henwood "M" series or a wireline

drilling system similar in construction and equal in performance to Longyear
"Q" series. The CONTRACTOR shall have both internal and bottom
discharge diamond core bits on the job. The diamond core bits will have the
appropriate stones per carat recommended by the bit manufacturer for the
rock encountered. The CONTRACTOR will furnish all supplies for core
drilling, which shall include but not limited to, casing, drill rods, core barrels,
NO.

1
3

diamond set coring bits, piping, pumps, water, tools and power required for
REVISIONS
drilling and boxes and containers required for core samples. The
CONTRACTOR's drilling equipment shall be capable of drilling vertical core
PREPARED BY: TEQ
holes to depths of at least 50 meters. Terrain may vary from flat to high
DATE: 18-02-2008
relief, thus necessitating skid mounted drills and suitable support equipment
CHK’D BY:
in some locations.
APPROVED
b) Procedures
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

All holes shall be drilled vertically to the bottom elevations or depths

specified unless indicated otherwise in the SERVICE ORDER or when
directed by the COMPANY to be drilled otherwise. Casing of the
overburden may be required when coring in soft rock or through an
unstable overburden. The casing shall be seated tightly into rock prior to
OPERATING DEPARTMENT any coring. Otherwise, the CONTRACTOR may use drilling mud to keep
the hole open provided that during coring no contamination of rock samples
______________________________
occur and good core recovery is achieved. If the samples are contaminated
______________________________ or otherwise inadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall drill a new hole to the
______________________________ same depths and take additional rock cores at no additional cost to the
COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall operate his drills at such speeds and
CERTIFIED
with such water pressures as will ensure maximum core recovery in
whatever kind of rock is being drilled. Where soft or broken rocks are
encountered, the CONTRACTOR shall reduce the length of runs to 0.6
BY:
MSM meters (2 feet) or less and/or use a larger diameter core barrel in order to
DATE:
reduce core loss and core disturbance to the minimum. Failure to comply
with the foregoing procedures shall constitute justification for the
COMPANY to require redrilling at the CONTRACTOR's expense of any
boring from which the core recovery is unsatisfactory. In as much as the
function of core borings includes determination of the width, direction,
extent and spacing of rock fractures, the CONTRACTOR shall exercise
THIS DRAWING IS NOT particular care in recording water losses, rod drops, and other unusual
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
coring experience that indicate the existence, nature and extent of any
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
fracturing or solution activity. Fractures and cavities with their estimated
CERTIFIED AND DATED thickness shall be marked in the core boxes. Spacers shall be used to
visually indicate open fractures, cavities or, samples, which have been
removed.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 12
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

c) Logging and Labeling

CHK’D

The CONTRACTOR shall keep a careful and complete record of the results
of all boring and sampling. Soil and rock materials shall be classified by the
CONTRACTOR immediately following the drilling. The log of each boring
shall include the time of drilling required for each "run", with the precise
DESCRIPTION

depths and elevations of the top and bottom of the run, the percentage of
core recovered per run, the depth and elevation at which ground water is
encountered, and the amount of drill water lost. Each boring shall be logged
on a separate log sheet for each ten meters of drilling (or less), and a
complete log of each hole shall be submitted prior to payment for that hole.
The labeling of core boxes shall be done in the manner prescribed. The
materials encountered in drilling shall be visually classified according to soil
NO.

1
3

types as defined in ASTM D2487 or, if appropriate, ASTM D3282.

REVISIONS

d) Cementing Holes During Drilling

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
The CONTRACTOR will take such precautions as necessary to prevent
CHK’D BY:
mixing of caving materials from the walls of the hole with core samples, or
to avoid loss of circulation of drill fluid and poor core recovery. This may
APPROVED
necessitate cementing the hole to seal or stabilize the side walls. Such
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT cementing will be considered incidental to the cost of rock coring and no
extra payment will be made unless specifically agreed to in the SERVICE
ORDER.

E. Sample Containers

OPERATING DEPARTMENT The CONTRACTOR shall furnish jars, tubes, bags, labels, tags, boxes and crates
for sample containment and freighting. Samples obtained from test borings shall be
______________________________
contained as follows:
______________________________

______________________________ 1) Soil Classification and SPT Samples

CERTIFIED
Samples retained for laboratory classification (visual or by testing) may be in
heavy duty plastic bags of one-quart capacity or other containers approved by
the COMPANY. Moisture content sample bags shall be tightly sealed to prevent
BY:
MSM moisture loss. Each bag shall be identified with a label or tag, which clearly
DATE:
indicates the PROJECT, boring number, sample number, top elevation of
boring, sample depth, "N" value from SPT (if applicable), and a description of
material.

2) "Undisturbed" Samples

THIS DRAWING IS NOT This includes thin-wall Shelby tube samples, California (liner type) samples,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Denison or Pitcher samples, or any other samples recovered in metal tubes.
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
The sample shall be retained in the tube for shipment to the laboratory. For
CERTIFIED AND DATED samples consisting of stiff clays or cemented soils, the ends of the tube shall be
tightly sealed with wax, metal caps and/or plastic membrane, subject to
approval by the COMPANY. Sample tubes, containing cohesionless soils or soft

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 13
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

clays, shall be sealed as described in Section 2.03, paragraph B.3.c. Each

CHK’D

sample shall be identified with a label or tag as required in subparagraph (1)

above.

3) Rock Cores
DESCRIPTION

a) Boxes

Longitudinally partitioned wooden core boxes constructed of dressed lumber

or other approved materials in accordance with the arrangement and
dimensions shown in Plate II-1 shall be used for all rock cores. As many core
boxes as may be required shall be used in submitting each rock core or
group of cores. Core from more than one (1) test boring shall not be placed in
NO.

1
3

a single core box except with written permission from the COMPANY, in
REVISIONS
which case the core holes contained in a single box shall be consecutively
numbered. Core boxes shall be completely equipped with all necessary
PREPARED BY: TEQ
partitions, covers, hinges and screws for holding down the cover, permanent
DATE: 18-02-2008
identification plates, tags, spacer blocks, and other accessories. The run
CHK’D BY:
number, core length drilled, core length lost, depth designation and recovery
shall be written directly upon the spacer blocks. The coordinates of the
APPROVED
boring, ground surface elevation, date of drilling, box number, PROJECT
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT name, hole number, delivery order number, and CONTRACTOR's name
shall be written upon the inside and outside of the lid. The inside label shall
be in accordance with the requirements shown on Plate II-2. Each end of the
box shall be marked with the PROJECT name, hole number, and box
number. Empty portions of the core boxes shall have several wide divider
blocks nailed at about the third points to prevent the longitudinal dividers from
OPERATING DEPARTMENT bowing and allowing the sample to shift.

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 14
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D
DESCRIPTION
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

PLATE II-1
TYPICAL CORE BOX
TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 15
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

PROJECT :______________________________________________
DESCRIPTION

PTS NO./S.O. NO. ____________________

BORING NO. : ________________

ELEVATION: ________________
NO.

1
3

COORDINATES: N. _ E.

REVISIONS

STATION:_____________________ OFFSET:______________________
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
DATE (S) DRILLED:_______________________

BOX NO. OF BOXES

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________

OPERATING DEPARTMENT NOTES:

______________________________
1. LABEL OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO ALLOW ALL INFORMATION TO BE CLEAR
______________________________
AND ELIGIBLE ON PHOTOGRAPH OF CORE.
______________________________
2. LOCATION MAY BE EITHER BY COORDINATES OR BY STATIONING, AS
APPROPRIATE TO THE PROJECT.
CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

PLATE II-2
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING TYPICAL CORE BOX LABEL
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 16
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

b) Arrangement

All cores shall be arranged neatly in the partitioned boxes in the same
sequence in which they occurred before removal from the hole. Facing the
open box, with the hinged cover away from the observer and the open box
DESCRIPTION

closer to the observer, cores shall be arranged in descending sequence

beginning at the upper left end of the partition farthest from the observer and
continuing in the other partitions from left to right to the right hand corner
close to the observer. The highest core shall be placed in Box 1, and lower
portions of the core shall be placed in the other boxes in consecutive order.
All cores shall be photographed with a folding rule or measuring tape
temporarily placed lengthwise along the edge of the box so that core piece
NO.

1
3

lengths may be readily discerned. The photographs shall clearly illustrate the
REVISIONS
condition of the core, and the identification labels and marks outlined in
subparagraph (a), above. Copies of photographs of all cores recovered on
PREPARED BY: TEQ
the PROJECT shall be included in the final report.
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
c) Test Samples
APPROVED
Rock samples selected for testing shall be preserved by wrapping with
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT plastic membrane and sealing to avoid moisture loss, or by other methods
subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Preserved samples shall be
properly positioned in the core box and identified with a tag or label as
required in subparagraph (1), above.

F. Care and Delivery of Samples

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for preserving all samples in his
______________________________
possession in good condition. The CONTRACTOR shall keep samples from
______________________________ freezing, from undue exposure to the weather and sun, and shall keep all
______________________________ descriptive labels and designations on sample jars, bags, and boxes clean and
legible. Samples shall be delivered within the time limits specified for each type of
CERTIFIED
investigation. In general, no sample shall remain at the WORK SITE for more than
one week after being taken. Samples shall be retained by the CONTRACTOR at
his laboratory for a period of not less than ninety (90) days following submittal of
BY:
MSM the final report. The CONTRACTOR may then either destroy the samples, or make
DATE:
delivery to the COMPANY if so directed by the COMPANY.

G. Freighting

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for freighting all samples for which
laboratory testing is required as specified in the SERVICE ORDER. This includes
THIS DRAWING IS NOT transportation to the CONTRACTOR's laboratory and may include commercial
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
freighting to other laboratories if required for tests, which the CONTRACTOR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
cannot perform in his laboratory or within the time frame of the SERVICE ORDER.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 17
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

H. Supplementary Subsurface Exploration

CHK’D

Subsurface exploration, that is abandoned or from which unsatisfactory samples

are being obtained, shall be supplemented by other exploration adjacent to the
original, in order that satisfactory samples or the required information is obtained.
Penetration to abandonment depth or to the depths where unsatisfactory samples
DESCRIPTION

were obtained, may be made by any methods selected by the CONTRACTOR that
in the opinion of the COMPANY will permit satisfactory completion. No additional
payment will be made for supplementary subsurface explorations that are required
to replace those abandoned or from which satisfactory samples were not obtained
because of mechanical failure of equipment, negligence on the part of the
CONTRACTOR, or other preventable causes for which the CONTRACTOR is
responsible. Payment will be made for acceptable portions of these supplementary
NO.

1
3

subsurface explorations below the depths or outside the reaches of the previously
REVISIONS
accepted WORK.
PREPARED BY: TEQ
2.04 EXPLORATION – OPEN EXCAVATION AND SAMPLING METHODS
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
A. Test Pits and Sampling
APPROVED
1) Definition
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

A test pit will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock, or overburden, which
has an open cross-section area large enough to permit efficient excavation,
engineering inspection, and undisturbed sampling. Test pit excavations will not
be continued below the water table.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT 2) Equipment and Supplies

______________________________
The equipment and supplies shall include suitable backhoes, picks, shovels,
______________________________ and sampling tools. Backhoes used for all test pitting shall be capable of digging
______________________________ pits to depths specified in the SERVICE ORDER. Supplies, which the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall include
CERTIFIED
split metal cylinders complete with bolts and nuts for tightening, and/or bolted
metal or wooden boxes of acceptable size and types. The minimum inside
dimensions of tightened cylinders shall be 200 mm (8 inches) in diameter by
BY:
MSM 300 mm (12 inches) in length and the cubic boxes, shall have 250 mm (10
DATE:
inches) dimensions. Accessories to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall
include a small sample trimming shovel or spade, hatchet, trimming knife,
paraffin and facilities for melting and brush application, trowels, labels, boxes for
shipping samples, and lumber for shoring test pits. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish bags with ties and tags for containing disturbed samples.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT 3) Procedures

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
a) Excavation
CERTIFIED AND DATED

Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the COMPANY Safety

Manual, Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 18
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

b) Undisturbed Sampling

In obtaining undisturbed samples from test pits, the undisturbed natural

physical and structural characteristics of the samples of in-situ material shall
be preserved insofar as possible both while samples are being taken and
DESCRIPTION

during shipment to the point of testing. In cohesive and partially cohesive

soils, this may be accomplished by isolating the soil column or cube to be
sampled by gently trenching around it and knife-trimming it to the required
dimensions of the split cylinder or box. A thin coating of melted paraffin shall
then be applied quickly, but gently, to the sample with a paint brush, to seal it
against loss of moisture. The metal or wooden sample container, with bolts
tightened shall then be placed over the paraffin coated sample and all
NO.

1
3

clearances between the sample and the walls of the container filled with
REVISIONS
melted paraffin. After the paraffin has hardened, the soil column or cube shall
be cut-off a few inches below the container, the sample and container
PREPARED BY: TEQ
inverted and removed from the pit, and the sample trimmed at the base. A
DATE: 18-02-2008
brush coating of paraffin shall then be applied to the exposed portion. Where
CHK’D BY:
overburden materials to be sampled are only partially cohesive, it is best not
to isolate the soil column for its full length before paraffining and lowering the
APPROVED
container. By exposing and paraffining small sections at a time, and
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT progressively lowering the container, the sample will be subjected to less
disturbance. Where natural moisture content is an important factor, delay
shall be avoided in taking the sample, in order that the natural moisture
content of the material may be retained to the fullest extent.

c) Disturbed sampling
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

Disturbed samples shall be taken from the side walls of the test pit. The size
______________________________
of the disturbed samples shall be adequate for the quantity of materials
______________________________ required for the types of laboratory tests outlined in the SERVICE ORDER.
______________________________ Sample containers may be cloth or burlap bags or, if moisture loss is to be
minimized, heavy duty plastic bags. In any case, the strength of the bags
CERTIFIED
must be sufficient to resist tearing or splitting during handling of the
contained samples. All bags must contain an inside label and an outside tag
showing pertinent information as required for Soil Classification Samples.
BY:
MSM
DATE:
d) Disposition of Samples

Cylindrical and box samples shall be packed in dry packing and freighted in
sturdy wooden boxes of strength and construction sufficient to guarantee
against damage during shipment. Boxes should be no larger than is required
for freighting two such samples. Both box samples and boxed cylindrical
THIS DRAWING IS NOT samples shall be marked "FRAGILE – HANDLE WITH CARE" and shall be
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
identified by labels, similar to those for Undisturbed Samples taken from
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
borings, attached to inside and outside of each box. The CONTRACTOR
CERTIFIED AND DATED shall avoid exposing sealed and crated samples to extremes of temperature.
Undisturbed Samples permitted to freeze, even partially, shall be replaced by

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 19
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall not hold these
CHK’D

samples at the site of exploration for a period in excess of one (1) week.

B. Test Trenches and Sampling

1) Definition
DESCRIPTION

A test trench will be any excavation in soil, decomposed rock or overburden

with a cross-section equal to the width of a bulldozer blade. Test trenches will
not be continued below the water table.

2) Equipment and Supplies

NO.

1
3

The equipment and supplies shall include suitable bulldozers, hand tools and
REVISIONS
sampling equipment. Test trenches, which are to be dug to refusal, shall be
excavated using a bulldozer equivalent to a Caterpillar Model D-9 rated at 385
PREPARED BY: TEQ
HP off the flywheel with a dozer blade and a single tooth ripper. Supplies, which
DATE: 18-02-2008
the CONTRACTOR shall furnish for obtaining undisturbed samples, shall be as
CHK’D BY:
listed in "Test Pits and Sampling".
APPROVED
3) Procedures
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

a) Excavation shall conform to the requirements of the company Safety Manual,

Part 3, Section 1-307, "Excavation and Trenches".

b) Sampling shall be as specified in "Test Pits and Sampling".

OPERATING DEPARTMENT C. Testing

______________________________
Testing of materials exposed by excavation shall be performed as directed by the
______________________________ COMPANY. Testing may include any of the WORK described in Section 2.07,
______________________________ Standards for In-Situ Field Testing and Instrumentation, subparagraphs A, B, C, H,
K and L. The payment for such field testing shall be exclusive of payment for test
CERTIFIED
pit and/or trenches, based on the established unit price for each test.

2.05 EXPLORATION – CONE PENETRATION TEST METHODS

BY:
MSM
DATE:
The scope, definitions, apparatus, procedure, special techniques, precautions,
precision, accuracy and report shall be in accordance with ASTM D3441, "Deep, Quasi
– Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soil". The equipment shall be
capable of exerting 100 kg/cm2 pressure on a standard cone tip.

2.06 EXPLORATION - GEOPHYSICAL METHODS

THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
The scope, definitions, and procedures for geophysical explorations shall be in general
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the apparatus used by the
CERTIFIED AND DATED CONTRACTOR for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,
special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be subject to
approval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the following

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 20
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

requirements for each type of test. The type of apparatus and auxiliary equipment,
CHK’D

special techniques, precautions, precision, accuracy and report shall be subject to

approval by the COMPANY and shall be in general accordance with the following
requirements for each type of test.

A. Refraction Seismic Testing

DESCRIPTION

1) Equipment

The apparatus used for refraction seismic testing shall be of the hammer-impact
sensitive type similar to the Nimbus Enhancement Seismograph Model ES-125
or the Bison Model 1575 B, Automatic Signal Enhancement Seismograph.
Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, Vertical Geophone,
NO.

1
3

Horizontal Geophone, as well as hammers, cables, switches, and other items

REVISIONS
required for the performance of a complete seismic refraction traverse having a
length of at least 100 meters.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
2) Procedures
CHK’D BY:

Refraction surveys will be conducted in accordance with the procedures

APPROVED
recommended for the equipment being used, and shall provide a precision and
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT accuracy of data as required for evaluation of strata changes within a maximum
depth of 30 meters. Hammer impact points, generally, should not be farther
apart than 3 meters and the spacing should be reduced, where necessary, to
accurately delineate changes in seismic velocity of subsurface materials.
Elevation of ground surface shall be determined at each impact point relative to
a bench mark elevation provided by the COMPANY's Survey Division or to the
OPERATING DEPARTMENT center of traverse at an assumed elevation of 100.000 meters. Double traverse
(forward and reverse) shall be performed at each location to evaluate strata dip
______________________________
and subsurface irregularities. Right angle double traverses and/or radial
______________________________ traverses may be required as directed by the COMPANY. Seismic velocity at a
______________________________ given impact point shall be based on the cumulative average of "first arrival"
wave time for three or more hammer blows.
CERTIFIED
3) Records
BY:
MSM When a clear wave pattern is developed for "first arrival" wave time, the time
DATE:
shall be recorded in the field notes for the traverse. When the "first arrival" is
questionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip Chart
Recorder. Field notes and computations shall be recorded on forms described
in the following subparagraph 6.A.4. Records and copies shall be provided to
the COMPANY as required therein. If voluminous, The records may be
presented in a separate volume of the final report.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
4) Analysis and reports
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED Analysis of field data shall generally conform to the procedures and techniques
described in "The Handbook of Engineering Geophysics", Bison Instruments,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minnesota, USA. When field data is voluminous, the

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 21
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

computer program for analysis of the multiple-dipping-layer structure described

CHK’D

in Chapter 12 of the Handbook, may be used. Reports shall include time-

distance plots showing average arrival time from each impact point, "best fit"
velocity and depth for each stratum, dip and top of rock irregularities. Where
possible, evaluation of subsurface materials should be correlated with
subsurface conditions encountered in test borings or exposed in natural
DESCRIPTION

outcrops or man-made excavations.

B. Cross-Hole Seismic Testing

1) Objective and Principle

This test shall be used to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wave
NO.

1
3

velocities through subsurface materials at various depths for estimation of

REVISIONS
physical characteristics and engineering parameters of the materials.
PREPARED BY: TEQ
The principle consists of recording the time it takes for a particular type of sonic
DATE: 18-02-2008
wave to travel a known distance between the impulse originating in one
CHK’D BY:
borehole and the signal receiving device, geophone, in another borehole. The
signal received by geophone is amplified, displayed and enhanced by a remote
APPROVED
seismograph on the ground surface.
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

2) Equipment

The apparatus used for cross-hole seismic testing shall be of the hammer
impact sensitive type similar to the signal enhancement seismograph OYO
MSBIS-150. Accessory equipment shall include a Strip Chart Recorder, Vertical
OPERATING DEPARTMENT Geophone, hammer, cables, switches and other items required for the
performance of cross-hole seismic testing.
______________________________

______________________________ 3) Procedures
______________________________

At present, there is no ASTM or other Industry Standard available for this test.
CERTIFIED
Until such a Standard becomes available, the following test procedure shall
generally be followed:
BY:
MSM a) The receiver hole shall be drilled, sampled and cased to the maximum
DATE:
desired depth of the cross-hole test.

b) The impulse hole shall be drilled a distance of three to five meters away to
about 1.5 meters depth. The drill rod shall then be detached from the rig
and a steel anvil shall be screwed on the rod.

THIS DRAWING IS NOT c) The rod shall be struck with a sledge hammer, creating an impulse that
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
travels down the rod and into the soil, and also initiating the time base in
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
the seismograph.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 22
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

d) The impulse shall be detected by a geophone, placed at the same depth

CHK’D

as the end of the rod in the receiver hole, and relayed in electronic signal
to the seismograph.

e) The seismograph shall display the wave pattern sensed by the geophone
on its cathode ray tube screen.
DESCRIPTION

f) This pattern shall be shown to the scale of a preselected time base such
that the time from the original impulse to the time of the impulse arrival for
various waves can be measured.

g) Knowing the travel time and travel distance, the wave velocities at that
particular depth shall be computed.
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS
h) The drill rod shall be advanced to a greater depth and the above
procedure repeated.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
4) Records
CHK’D BY:

When a clear pattern is developed for the first arrival time of the various waves,
APPROVED
the time shall be recorded in the field notes. When the first arrival times are
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT questionable, the wave pattern shall be reproduced on the Strip Chart
Recorder. Records and copies shall be provided to the COMPANY.

5) Analyses and Reports

Field data shall be analyzed to determine compression (P) and shear (S) wave
OPERATING DEPARTMENT velocities and estimate therefrom the physical and engineering characteristics
of the materials. Reports shall include time-distance plots showing average
______________________________
arrival time for the two waves from each impact point, best fit velocities and
______________________________ depth for each test. Where possible, evaluation of subsurface materials should
______________________________ be correlated with subsurface conditions encountered in test borings or exposed
in natural outcrops or man-made excavations.
CERTIFIED
C. Electrical Resistivity
BY:
MSM The apparatus and accessory equipment used for evaluation of subsurface
DATE:
conditions, based on the apparent electrical Resistivity, shall be comparable to the
Soil Test R-40C Resistivity Meter with a sensitivity adequate for evaluation of
materials to a depth of 30 meters. The scope, definitions, procedure, special
techniques and precautions, report and precision and accuracy shall be in
accordance with ASTM G-57, "Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the
Wenner Four-Electrode Method". Analysis of field data shall generally conform to
THIS DRAWING IS NOT the procedures and techniques described in "Earth Resistivity Manual", Soil Test,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Inc., Evanston, Illinois, U.S.A., and the results shall be presented as described
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
therein.
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 23
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

2.07 STANDARDS FOR IN-SITU FIELD TESTING AND INSTRUMENTATION

CHK’D

A. Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content

In accordance with any of the standard test procedures described in:

1) ASTM D1556 : Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method
DESCRIPTION

2) ASTM D2167 : Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-Balloon

Method

3) ASTM D2922 : Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
NO.

1
3

4) ASTM D2937 : Density of Soil In-Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method

REVISIONS

The method used shall be clearly indicated for each test result presented in the
PREPARED BY: TEQ
final report.
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
B. Moisture Content Direct
APPROVED
In accordance with ASTM D3017, "Moisture Content of Soil and Soil Aggregate In-
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)".

C. Plate Bearing Tests

In Accordance with ASTM D1194, "Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static Load on
Spread Footings", except that dial gages accurate to 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) shall
OPERATING DEPARTMENT be used to measure deflections. The Unit Rate for this item shall include
mobilization/demobilization charges.
______________________________

______________________________ D. Full Scale Spread Footing Load Tests

______________________________

In general accordance with ASTM D1194. For each specific case, the
CERTIFIED
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY the test set up, the equipment to be
used, the step by step procedure and the final report format. Tests will not be
started until these documents are reviewed and approved by the COMPANY.
BY:
MSM Testing equipment shall be capable of exerting maximum test load up to 2700 kN
DATE:
(˜300 tons). Mobilization/Demobilization for this item shall be paid as a separate
pay item.

E. Pile Load Test

Mobilization/Demobilization for the following tests shall be paid as a separate pay

THIS DRAWING IS NOT item:
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
1) Compression Load Test
CERTIFIED AND DATED

In accordance with ASTM D1143, "Piles under Axial Compressive Load",

except that the ASTM D1143 (Figure 1) loading method of jacking against

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 24
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

hold-down piles shall not be used where dead-load reaction is feasible. The
CHK’D

equipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of up to 1800 kN

(˜200 tons).

2) Tension Load Test

DESCRIPTION

In accordance with ASTM D3689, "Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile
Load". The equipment shall be capable of applying a maximum test load of up
to 900 kN (˜100 tons).

3) Lateral Load Test

In accordance with ASTM D3966, "Piles Under Lateral Loads". The equipment
NO.

1
3

shall be capable of applying maximum test load of up to 900 kN (˜100 tons).

REVISIONS

4) Inclined Tension Load Test

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
This test will generally be applicable to foundations of transmission line towers
CHK’D BY:
where the stub angle is embedded in foundation concrete at an angle to the
vertical. In the absence of a directly related ASTM Standard, the test shall be
APPROVED
performed in general accordance with ASTM D3689, except as modified
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT hereafter.

The testing assembly shall be capable of applying a maximum tensile load of

1100 kN (˜125 tons) in a direction axial to the stub angle at a tower footing.
The test loads shall be transmitted to the ground through the test frame resting
on leveling pads on the ground.
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

Horizontal and vertical movements shall be measured during the test at a

______________________________
minimum of three locations on the footing. The movement of the stub angle
______________________________ shall be measured at two locations. The dial gages for measuring movements
______________________________ shall be either 0.076 mm (0.003) in.) per division or 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) per
division, as necessary for accurate assessment of movement. Electronic load
CERTIFIED
cells shall be used to measure the applied load by the jacks. These cells shall
be accurate to about 890 N (200 lbs.), and shall be calibrated before and after
the tests are performed.
BY:
MSM
DATE:
Loads shall be applied in maximum increments of 45 kN (˜5 tons). Each load
shall be held for a minimum of about 15 minutes, or until the movement rate
becomes less than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Load shall be raised to
design load and held for at least 6 hours. Unloading shall be done in three
equal decrements. Each decrement shall be held until the rate of movement is
less than 0.254 mm (0.01 in.) per hour. Readings during loading and
THIS DRAWING IS NOT unloading shall be taken at time intervals of 30 seconds, 1, 2, 4, 8, 15, 30
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
minutes and one hour as necessary. The final readings after unloading shall
FOR ORDERING be taken immediately and 2 hours after all the load has been removed. The
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED above procedure shall be repeated by reloading the foundation to failure or to
a maximum specified test load and then unloading in three decrements.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 25
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

The report shall present load-movement curve for each test together with the
CHK’D

estimated failure load. The observed mode of failure shall also be described.

F. Ground Water Observations and Permeability Tests

1) Piezometer Installation and Observation

DESCRIPTION

Will be directed primarily towards evaluation of "static" water levels and

possible seasonal variations thereof, as recorded by water levels measured in
observation wells. The Piezometers shall be of the stand pipe type, utilizing
perforated PVC pipe, plastic filter screens and selected backfill materials
installed in drilled holes as shown on Plates II-3 and II-4. The installation and
observation shall be in accordance with Chapter 1.10, Ground Water
NO.

1
3

Investigation, "Foundation Engineering Handbook", Winterhorn and Fang, Van

REVISIONS
Nostrand Reinhold Co. 1975. Piezometers may be installed in test borings,
subject to the approval of the COMPANY, or in special holes drilled for
PREPARED BY: TEQ
installation of Piezometers. In either case, drilling of the hole will be a separate
DATE: 18-02-2008
pay item or items.
CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 26
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D
DESCRIPTION
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 27
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D
DESCRIPTION
NO.

1
3

REVISIONS

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

PLATE II-4
PIEZOMETER DETAIL – MULTIPLE INSTALLATIONS
TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 28
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

2) Permeability Testing
CHK’D

Shall be limited to falling-head type testing conducted in suitably cased bore

holes, or in standpipes or Piezometers contained in adequately backfilled bore
holes. General procedures shall be in accordance with the reference cited in
subparagraph (1), preceding.
DESCRIPTION

G. Electrical Resistivity

Where definitive values of electrical resistivity of subsurface materials are required

for analysis of grounding problems for COMPANY structures, the field tests will be
conducted in accordance with ASTM G57, Rev. A, "Field Measurement of Soil
Resistivity Using the Wenner Four Electrode Method", as also required in Section
NO.

1
3

2.06.C for geophysical exploration.

REVISIONS

H. Thermal Resistivity
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
In accordance with IEEE* 442, "Soil Thermal Resistivity Measurements", an outline
CHK’D BY:
of the procedure is described herein: Insert the probe into a soil mass and allow
the probe to come into thermal equilibrium with the soil. An electrical current is
APPROVED
then passed through the heating element causing temperature rises in the interior
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT of the probe. A thermocouple inside the probe measures the heat rise and
readings are taken at intervals measured by a stopwatch. The time temperature
data reduction is done then by graphical means. More sophisticated data reduction
procedures may be adopted by the CONTRACTOR upon COMPANY's approval.
Supplementary soil data (e.g., in-situ soil density and moisture content) shall be
obtained as directed by the COMPANY.
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

I. Field Vane Shear Test

______________________________

______________________________ Vane Shear Test shall be in accordance with ASTM D2573, "Method for Field
______________________________ Vane Shear Test in Cohesive Soils".

CERTIFIED
J. Pressuremeter Test

Pressuremeter testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D4719, "Standard Test

BY:
MSM Method for Pressuremeter Testing in Soils".
DATE:

K. Percolation Test

In accordance with the ARAMCO Sanitary Code, Section IX-B, 9.18.4.

L. Other Considerations
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
Certain other Standards, which shall be observed in the performance of field
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
WORK but do not represent separate pay items include:
CERTIFIED AND DATED

1) General Field Procedures – in accordance with ASTM D420, "Investigating and

Sampling Soil and Rock for Engineering Purposes".

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 29
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

2) Visual Classification of Soil – field evaluation of soil classification based on

CHK’D

ASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes", and ASTM

D2488, "Descriptions of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures), or ASTM D3282,
"Classification of Soil and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction
Purposes", as directed by the COMPANY.
DESCRIPTION

2.08 FIELD RECORDS

The CONTRACTOR shall keep accurate subsurface logs and records of all field work
accomplished under this CONTRACT and shall deliver complete, legible copies of
these logs and records to the COMPANY upon completion of the WORK or at such
other time or times as he may be directed. All such records shall be preserved in good
condition and order by the CONTRACTOR until they are delivered and accepted. The
NO.

1
3

COMPANY shall have the right to examine such records at any time prior to their
REVISIONS
delivery. Separate logs shall be made for each hole and test pit. The following
information shall be included on the logs or in the records for each hole:
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
A. Hole number or designation and elevation of top hole
CHK’D BY:

B. Make and manufacturer's model designation of test-pit and trench excavation,

APPROVED
drilling, and cone testing equipment
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

C. Type of drilling, sampling, and cone testing operation by depth

D. Dates and time by depths when test-pit and trench excavation, drilling, sampling
and cone testing operations were performed

OPERATING DEPARTMENT E. Depths at which samples or cores were recovered or attempts made to sample or
core including top and bottom depth of each run.
______________________________

______________________________ F. Classification or description by depths of the materials sampled, cored, or

______________________________ penetrated including a description of moisture conditions and of conditions of
compactness or stiffness of materials encountered. This classification or
CERTIFIED
description shall be made immediately following the taking of the samples or cores
and in accordance with ASTM D2487 and ASTM D2488.
BY:
MSM G. Penetration and resistance such as drive-hammer blows given in blows per foot or
DATE:
part thereof for driving sample spoons and casing and as the pressure in pounds
per square inch applied to push undisturbed samples

H. Percentage of sample or core recovered per run and RQD value expressed as a
percentage

THIS DRAWING IS NOT I. Depth at which ground water is encountered. Record Static Water Level and date
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
at least 24 hours after the hole is finished
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED J. Depths at which drill water is lost and amounts. Depth and distance of drill rod
drops

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 30
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

K. Depth of bottom of hole

CHK’D

Additionally, records of test data for all field testing shall be provided in accordance
with the Standards specified in Section 2.07. The CONTRACTOR will provide sample
copies of standard forms for each test to the COMPANY for review and approval prior
to performance of tests. The presence of a COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE or the
DESCRIPTION

keeping of separate records by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
the responsibility for the WORK specified in this paragraph. Payment will not be made
for any WORK for which the required records have not been furnished by the
CONTRACTOR.

2.09 LABORATORY TESTING

NO.

1
3

All samples received in the laboratory shall be inspected and visually classified by an
REVISIONS
engineer or geologist. The condition of the samples shall be recorded and
representative samples suitable for testing shall be selected and stored in a manner
PREPARED BY: TEQ
that will protect the samples from fluctuations in temperature or low humidity.
DATE: 18-02-2008
Regardless of the basic purpose or type of test (classification, strength, volume
CHK’D BY:
change), it is not intended that all samples be subjected to testing. Testing should be
limited to samples representative of significant subsurface conditions; and, the
APPROVED
numbers and types of test should be limited to those which will contribute to the
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT geotechnical evaluation of subsurface conditions for the specific PROJECT. Payment
will not be made for any laboratory testing that represents needless duplication of test
data or that is not related to significant tangible geotechnical considerations or that is
not specifically identified in the approved SERVICE ORDER.

2.10 STANDARDS FOR LABORATORY TESTING

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

Where relevant Standards are applicable, the laboratory WORK shall be conducted in
______________________________
accordance with the procedures of the American Society for Testing and Materials
______________________________ (ASTM) or in accordance to such other procedures and Standards delineated or
______________________________ referenced herein. Where relevant standards are not necessarily applicable, guide
Standards are provided. Reference to a specific standard does not necessarily
CERTIFIED
represent a pay item unless so indicated. Standards included in another test procedure
or which are required for the general operation of the laboratory (e.g. ASTM D421, "Dry
preparation of Soil Samples for Particles Size Analysis and Determination of Soil
BY:
MSM Constants") are not considered to be separate pay items. Standards for laboratory
DATE:
testing are as follows:

A. Visual Classification

Evaluation and classification of soil samples according to the criteria provided in

ASTM D2487, "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" and ASTM
THIS DRAWING IS NOT D2488, "Description of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedures)" or, if directed by the
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
COMPANY, ASTM D3282, "Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
Highway Construction Purposes", without benefit of supporting laboratory
CERTIFIED AND DATED classification test data; and, evaluation and classification of rock samples by
composition, structure and hardness according to the criteria described in Section

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 31
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

III: Guidelines for Preparation of Final Logs. Visual classification is not a separate
CHK’D

pay item.

B. Classification Testing

Identification of soil types based on laboratory testing shall not be separate pay
DESCRIPTION

item. The cost shall be included in the costs of the various tests required for
identification based on the criteria of ASTM D2487 or ASTM D3283. Tests shall be
assigned by the CONTRACTOR only after review of field data and visual
classification of samples recovered. Sufficient tests shall be performed to confirm
or modify visual classifications. Excessive testing, where definite visual
classification is possible, shall be avoided. Testing shall be done primarily on
materials, which are borderline and are difficult to classify. A soils sample would be
NO.

1
3

ML-CL or SP-SM. Classification tests shall include:

REVISIONS

1) Particle -Size Analysis/Mechanical

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
In accordance with ASTM D422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", but not
CHK’D BY:
including hydrometer analysis
APPROVED
2) Particle-Size Analysis/Hydrometer
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

In accordance with ASTM D422, "Particle-Size Analysis of Soils", plus

determination of specific gravity but not including sieve analysis

3) Percent Finer Than the #200, U.S. Standard Sieve

OPERATING DEPARTMENT In accordance with ASTM D1140

______________________________
4) Plasticity
______________________________

______________________________ Determination of the Plasticity Index based on the results of tests performed in
accordance with ASTM D4318, "Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
CERTIFIED
of Soils"

C. Index Properties Testing

BY:
MSM
DATE:
Tests include those required to group soils in major strata and to provide a basis
for evaluation of the structural characteristics utilizing a restricted number of
"Structural Properties Tests" described in subparagraph D, following. Index
properties tests required as a part of any other standard laboratory test procedure
(as in subparagraph B.2, above) are not pay items. When performed
independently of other test procedures, payment will be made on the basis of the
THIS DRAWING IS NOT actual tests performed. Tests are to be assigned after evaluation of field data and
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
as needed for extrapolation of other laboratory test data. Index properties tests
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
include:
CERTIFIED AND DATED

1) Moisture content

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 32
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

In accordance with ASTM D2216, "Laboratory Determination of Water

CHK’D

(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures".

2) Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content

No standard test procedure. Test to be performed on Undisturbed Soil

DESCRIPTION

Samples, Denison Samples or Rock Core with unaltered natural volume.

Determine total dry weight of a sample of measured total volume, compute
and provide Dry Unit Weight and Moisture Content.

3) Specific Gravity

Testing generally limited to materials finer than the #4, U.S. standard sieve in
NO.

1
3

accordance with ASTM D854, "Specific Gravity of Soils", unless otherwise

REVISIONS
directed by the COMPANY. Reported specific gravity shall be based on the
average of tests performed on three specimens of the same sample.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
4) Natural Relative Density
CHK’D BY:

Natural dry unit weights expressed as Relative Density based on maximum

APPROVED
and minimum densities, subparagraph E(2), following. Computation of relative
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT density is not a separate pay item.

D. Structural Properties Testing

Tests performed only on Undisturbed Soil Samples, Denison Samples or Rock

Core. The test program shall be planned for analysis of specific design problems
OPERATING DEPARTMENT and testing limited to specimens obtained from carefully selected high quality
samples. Tests performed on mediocre samples will not be accepted or paid for by
______________________________
the COMPANY. Rigid standardization of test procedures is not appropriate for
______________________________ these tests. The test procedures described in: Lambe, "Soil Testing for Engineers"
______________________________ (Ref. 1) and/or ASTM, "Procedures for Testing Soils (Ref. 2) are considered to be
appropriate with variations as described below:
CERTIFIED
1) Permeability
BY:
MSM Generally limited to the Constant Head Procedure (Ref. 2) on clean, coarse
DATE:
grained soils having less than ten percent (10%) finer than #200 U.S. standard
sieve. Test procedures described in ASTM D2434, "Permeability of Granular
Soils (Constant Head)", may be used as a guide.

2) Unconfined Compression

THIS DRAWING IS NOT Generally in accordance with the procedures outlined in Ref. 1. ASTM D2166,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
"Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil", may be used as a
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
guide. Trimming of specimens should be limited to "Squaring" of the ends (if
CERTIFIED AND DATED capping is not appropriate). Reduction of specimen diameter by trimming is
not acceptable. Ratio of specimen height to diameter should be less than
three and greater than two.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 33
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

3) Triaxial Compression

Generally in accordance with Ref. 1 and limitations on specimen trimming and

specimen sizes as described above for unconfined compression; and, triaxial
chambers and test platens must be of size to accommodate the specimens
DESCRIPTION

within these limitations. Triaxial tests to be paid for on a per test basis; either
as one of a series of tests at different confining pressures or as individual tests
at confining pressures approximately equal to "at-rest" lateral earth pressures
for the in-situ condition. The procedures described in ASTM D2850,
"Unconsolidated, Undrained Strength of Cohesive Soils in Triaxial
Compression", are generally adequate for that type of test. Consolidated,
undrained testing, with pore water pressure readings, as described in Ref. 1
NO.

1
3

will be required on all specimens tested at confining pressures comparable to

REVISIONS
earth pressure.
PREPARED BY: TEQ
4) Direct Shear
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
Generally limited to tests on cohesionless soils or to consolidated shear tests
on fine grained soils. Test procedures generally as described in either Ref. 1
APPROVED
or Ref. 2. Consolidated shear test procedures outlined in ASTM D3080,
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT "Direct Shear Test of Soils", may be used as a guide.

5) Elastic Moduli of Rock

In general accordance with ASTM D3148, "Elastic Moduli of Rock Core

Specimens in Unaxial Compression".
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

6) Consolidation
______________________________

______________________________ Test procedures generally as described in Ref. 1 or Ref. 2, except that

______________________________ individual loads may be maintained for more than 24 hours if secondary
compression is a consideration. Test procedures outlined in ASTM D2435,
CERTIFIED
"One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soils", may be used as a guide.
Test will be paid for on a per-increment-of-loading basis.
BY:
MSM 7) Expansion Pressure
DATE:

Specimen preparation and equipment as required in (6) above. Maximum

pressure required to maintain zero volume change for 24 hours following
saturation to be determined.

E. Compaction Testing
THIS DRAWING IS NOT Test to be performed on disturbed bulk soil samples representative of significant
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
materials. Structural properties tests may be assigned as required for geotechnical
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
evaluation of proposed construction and will be paid for separately from
CERTIFIED AND DATED compaction testing. Compaction tests, standards, and variations are as follows:

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 34
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

1) Modified Compaction
CHK’D

In accordance with ASTM D1557, "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-

Aggregate Mixtures Using 4.54 kg (10 lbs) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop",
Method "D"; but, compacted specimens shall not be re-used for successive
compaction determinations unless authorized by the COMPANY.
DESCRIPTION

2) Maximum and Minimum Densities

In accordance with ASTM D4253, "Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a

Vibratory Table", and ASTM D4254, "Minimum Index Density of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density". These test methods are applicable to soils that
may contain up to 15%, by weight, of soil particles passing a No. 200 sieve,
NO.

1
3

provided they still have cohesionless, free draining characteristics.

REVISIONS

3) California Bearing Ratio (CBR)

PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
In accordance with ASTM D1883, "Bearing Ratio of Laboratory Compacted
CHK’D BY:
Soils", and sample compaction performed as specified in subparagraph (1),
Modified Compaction, above, except that compaction energy will be varied as
APPROVED
directed by the COMPANY. Determination of maximum density and optimum
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT moisture by modified compaction is included and will not be paid as a separate
item. Pay items will include CBR 3-point, unsoaked and CBR 3-point, soaked (4
days surcharged, with swell measurements taken daily).

F. Chemical Analysis

OPERATING DEPARTMENT Chemical tests shall be performed for water soluble salts as a percent by weight of
dried sample at 1050C to include sodium, potassium, sulfate, chloride ions and
______________________________
sodium chloride.
______________________________

______________________________ G. Other Testing

CERTIFIED
Other laboratory testing than that described above will be required for materials
quality control. Such tests are included in Schedule © with appropriate ASTM or
other Standard designation.
BY:
MSM
DATE:
2.11 LABORATORY TEST RECORDS

All laboratory measurements and observations made for each test shall be recorded in
a near, legible manner or forms appropriate to the test being performed. Forms used
for this purpose are subject to the approval of the COMPANY. Copies of test data will
be provided to the COMPANY upon request. Original test data will be preserved for a
THIS DRAWING IS NOT period of three years after submitting the test results to the COMPANY or for a lesser
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
period if authorized by the COMPANY to destroy the data earlier.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

* END OF SECTION - II *

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 35
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

SECTION III – GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF FINAL LOGS

CHK’D

3.01 GENERAL

Final logs shall be prepared using information and pertinent results from field logs and
results of laboratory and/or field tests including Standard Penetration Test values.
DESCRIPTION

Overburden materials shall be classified according to ASTM D2487, "Classification of

Soils for Engineering Purposes"; and, ASTM D2488, "Description of Soils (Visual-Manual
Procedures)", for all investigations other than those, which are primarily intended for
evaluation of subgrade soils for pavement design. Soil designations and Group Symbols
shall be used on all logs, conforming to the Unified Soil Classification as outlined on Table
III-1, attached. Rock classification shall be based on standard geologic terminology with
applicable descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown on Table III-2, attached. Subgrade
NO.

1
3

soils will be classified in accordance with ASTM D3282, "Classification of Soils and Soil
REVISIONS
Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes". Elevation and depths shall be
shown for any change of material, weathering, top of rock and bottom of hole. Other
PREPARED BY: TEQ
pertinent information will be provided on the logs as described in the following paragraphs.
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 36
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

Unified Soil Classification System

Primary Divisions for Field and Group Laboratory Classification Supplementary Criteria
Typical Names
Laboratory Identification Symbol Criteria for Visual Identification
Clean
Coarse-grained Gravel. Gravels. GW Well graded gravels, Cu = D60/D10 Wide range in grain size
DESCRIPTION

(More than (Less than gravel-sand

soils (More than half 5% mixtures, and substantial amount
half of material of the coarse of material little or no fine. greater than 4 of all intermediate
finer than 3- fraction is
inch larger smaller than particle size.
than No 4 No. 200
2
sieve is larger sieve sieve Cz = (D30)

than No. 200 size about size.) D10 x D60

between 1 and 3
GP Poorly graded Not meeting both Predominantly one size
NO.

gravels, gravel-sand criteria for GW (uniformly graded) or

1
3

mixtures, little or no a range of sizes with

REVISIONS fines. some intermediate sizes
missing (gap graded).
Atterberg Atterberg
Gravels with GM Silty gravels, limits limits Nonplastic fines or
PREPARED BY: TEQ
below "A" above "A"
DATE: 18-02-2008 - do - - do - fines. (More and gravel-sand- line, line fines of low plasticity.
or PI less with PI
CHK’D BY: than 12% of silt mixtures. than 4 between
4 & 7 is
material border-
Atterberg
APPROVED smaller than GC Clayey gravels, and limits line case Plastic fines
No. 200 above "A"
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
sieve gravel-sand-clay line, GM-GC
and PI
size.)* mixtures. greater
than 7
Sands (More Clean sands SW Well graded sands, Cu = D60/D10 Wide range in grain
than half of (Less than
- do - the 5% gravelly sands, sizes and substantial
coarse
fraction of material little or no fines* greater than 6 amounts of all inter-
is smaller
than smaller than mediate particle sizes
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
No. 200
No. 4 sieve sieve Cz = (D30)2
size) size) D10 x D60
______________________________ between 1 and 3

______________________________
SP Poorly graded sands Not meeting both Predominately one size
and gravelly sands, criteria for SW (uniformly graded) or a
______________________________
little or no fines* range of sizes with
some intermediate sizes
missing (gap graded)
CERTIFIED Atterberg Atterberg
Sands with SM Silty sands, sand- limits limits Nonplastic fines or
below "A" above "A"
- do - - do - fines. (More silt mixtures. line, line fines of low plasticity.
BY: or PI less with PI
MSM than 12% of than 4 between
DATE: Atterberg 4 & 7 is
material SC Clayey sands, limits border- Plastic fines
above "A"
smaller than sand-clay mixtures line, line case
No. 200 with PI
sieve greater SM-SC
size)* than 7
Tough-
ML Reaction ness.
Atterberg
Inorganic silts, very limits Dry to Near
THIS DRAWING IS NOT Silts and below "A" Atterberg
TO BE USED FOR clays. fine sands, rock line, limits Strength Shaking Plastic
CONSTRUCTION OR or PI less above "A"
FOR ORDERING (Liquid limit less than 50) flour, silty or clayey than 4 line Limit
MATERIALS UNTIL Fine grained with PI
CERTIFIED AND DATED soils. fine sands. between None to Quick to None
(More than half 4 & 7 is
of border- slight slow
materials is line case
smaller than CL Inorganic clays of Atterberg ML-CL Medium None to Medium

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 37
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

No. low limits to

CHK’D

above "A"
200 sieve size.) - do - to medium plasticity; line, high very
with PI
(Visual: more gravelly clays, silty greater slow
than half of clays, sandy clays, than 7
particles are so lean clays.
fine that they OL Organic silts and Slight
cannot be seen - do - organic silt-clays Atterberg limits below "A" line. to Slow Slight
DESCRIPTION

by naked eye.) of low plasticity. medium.

MH Inorganic silts, mica- Slight Slow Slight
ceous or
- do - Silts and clays. (Liquid limit diatomaceous Atterberg limits below "A" line. to to to
greater than 50.) fine sands or silts, medium. none medium.
elastic silts.
Inorganic clays of
CH high High None High
- do - - do - plasticity, fat clays. Atterberg limits above "A" line. to very
high
NO.

OH Organic clays of Medium None to Slight

1
3

- do - medium to high Atterberg limits below "A" line. to very to

REVISIONS plasticity high slow medium
Peat, muck and
Pt other High ignition loss, LL and PI Organic color and odor,
PREPARED BY: TEQ - do - Highly organic soil highly organic soils. decrease after drying. spongy feel, frequently
fibrous texture.
DATE: 18-02-2008
* Materials with 5 to 12 percent smaller than No. 200 sieve are borderline cases, designated: GW-GM, SW-SC, etc.
CHK’D BY:

APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TABLE III – 1

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 38
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

Guide for Classification and Description of Rocks With Emphasis on Their Engineering Properties
Rock Applicable descript ive
Symbol General comment s Key t o physical propert ies of rocks Example
Classif icat ion propert y members
SANDSTONE The 25 rocks shown on t his plat e rep- Bedding Charac- - 1 Massive The physical propert ies of t he rock
resent t he principal rock t ypes encount ered t erist ics 2 Thin t o med. Bedded may be designat ed on t he boring logs
CONGLOMERATE Psuelogic variat ions f rom t hese common 3 Fissile eit her by word descript ion or by using
DESCRIPTION

rock f orms t hat have no engineering sig- 4 Crossbedded t he appropriat e number or numbers
COAL nif icance have been omit t ed int ent ionally. 5 Foliat ed shown here f or t he applicable propert ies.
Thus, while synit e or pegmat it e are recog- 6 Plat y Thus, t he log f or a core hole may be indi-
COMPACTION nized by geologist as dif f ering in cert ain 7 Fragment al cat ed on engineering drawings in t he
SHALE respect s f rom granit e, t o engineers t hese f ollowing manner:
CEMENTED dif f erence are not suf f icient pract ical sig- Lit hologic Charac- - 8 Clayey
SHALE nif icance t o various use of any t erm but t erist ics 9 Shaly
x x x x x x INDURATED "granit e" in ident if ying t hese rocks on 10 Calcareous (limy)
x x x x x x CLAY engineering drawings. On t he ot her hand, 11 Siliceous LOG EXAMPLE
LIMESTONE diorit e and gabbro are included because, 12 Sandy
in cert ain sect ions of t he count ry, t hese 13 Silt y
NO.

1
3

CHALK (OR MAL) are recognized as individual t orck t ypes, 14 Plast ic seams COMPACTION 12, 16, 28a,
REVISIONS part icularly in dimension st one and aggre- SHALE 34, 43, 46
CORAL gat e quarries. The rock symbols shown Hardness and Degree - 15 Very sof t or plast ic
on t he chart have been st andardized by t he of Cement at ion 16 Sof t - Can be scrat ched wit h f ingernail
PREPARED BY: TEQ GNESISS U.S. Geoligical Survey and have been used 17 Moderat ely hard - Can be scrached easily LIMESTONE 2, 9, 17, 22,
DATE: 18-02-2008
eidely by ot her Unit ed St at es and wit h knif e; cannot be scrat ched wit h 27a, 34, 36
SCHIST f oreign agencies. Consequent ly, when f ingernail.
CHK’D BY:
symbols are used t o dif f erenciat e rocks on 18 Hard - Dif f icult t o scrat ched wit h knif e
GRAYWACKE boring logs or geological cross sect ions, 19 Very hard - Cannot be scrat ched wit h knif e CEMENTED 13, 17, 27b,
only t he symbols appearing on t his chart 20 Poorly cement ed SHALE 33, 42, 45
APPROVED QUARTZITE shall be used. If a rock such as t rachyt e is 21 Cement ed
TRANSMISSION ASSET ident if ied on boring logs, t he symbol repre-
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
DOLOMITE sent ing t he most closely relat ed rock t ype Tenure - 22 Dense COAL 17, 33, 45
on t he chart , rhyolit e in t his case, shall be 23 Fine
MARBLE used. 24 Medium x x x x x x CLAY 1, 15, 33
25 Coarse xxxxxx
SOAPSTONE
OR SERPENTINE Inst ruct ion governing use St ruct ure - 26 Bedding a. Flat SANDSTONE 4, 9, 17, 21,
SLATE of descript ive propert ies b. Gent ly dipping 23, 27b, 33,
c. St eely dipping 36
OPERATING DEPARTMENT 27 Fract ures, scat t ered a. Open
This chart is issued as a st andard guide 28 Fract ures, closely spaced b. Cemented
f or describing rocks excavat ed f or 29 Brecciat ed (sheared & f ragment ed) or tight
______________________________ f oundat ions or cut slopes. It is not t o be 30 Joint s
GRANITE considered as amending pet rographic 31 Fault ed
______________________________
classif icat ion requirement s f or concret e 32 Slickensides
______________________________ DIORITE aggregat e invest igat ions or riprap. This
port ion of t he Manual is issued in recogni- Degree of Weat hering - 33 Unweat hered Where numbers are used on t he logs
GABBRO t ion of t he need f or unif orm and more t ruly 34 Slight ly weat hered t o indicat e t he physical propert ies, a
CERTIFIED represent at ive descript ion of bedrock con- 35 Badly weat hered key t o t he numbers must be indicat ed
RHYOLITE dit ions disclosed by drilling operat ions. on each sheet of log drawings.
For logs of rock borings t o present Solut ion and Void - 36 Solid, cont ains no void
BY: ANDESITE inf ormat ion t hat will simult aneously guide Condit ions 37 Vuggy (pit t ed) Such dat a as core losses or percent ages
MSM t he st ruct ural design engineer and assist 38 Vesicular of core recovery, dept hs of drill-wat er
DATE:
BASALT prospect ive cont ract ors in appraising t he 39 Porous loss, pressure-t est measurement s
(TRAP) excavat ion propert ies of rocks, t he lit ho- 40 Cavit ies obt ained in connect ion wit h drilling ope-
TUFF OR logic and physical propert ies encount ered 41 Cavernous rat ions also should be included on t he
TUFF BRECCIA by drilling or by ot her explorat ions will be logs as plot t ed on engineering drawings.
AGGLOMERATE enumerat ed in t he column t o t he right of t he Swelling Propert ies - 42 Nonswelling Wat er level measurement s should always
OR FLOW BRECCIA rock symbol, eit her by word descript ion or 43 Swelling be accompanied by t he dat es of which
by t he applicable propert y number shown t he measurement were made. The logs
on t his chart . Generally speaking, t he use Slaking Propert ies - 44 Nonslaking also should show t he dat es on which t he
of word descript ions is pref erable t o t he 45 Slakes slowly on exposure holes were drilled.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT use of propert y numbers. 46 Slakes readily on exposure
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
NOTES: 1. SAM E SOURCE AS TABLE III - 1
FOR ORDERING 2. IGNEOUS ROCK NOT COM M ONLY ENCOUNTERED IN EASTERN PROVINCE
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED
TABLE III-2

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 39
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

3.02 DENSITY OF SOILS

CHK’D

The density of coarse grained cohesionless soils and silts shall be described in
accordance with the following, where applicable:

A. Test Pits
DESCRIPTION

1) Loose : Easily excavated with hand shovel

2) Compact : Difficult to excavate with hand shovel

3) Dense : Must be loosened with pick to excavate with hand shovel

NO.

1
3

B. Soil Borings
REVISIONS

Where Standard Penetration Test (SPT) results are available and the penetration
PREPARED BY: TEQ
resistance does not appear to be influenced by other factors (e.g., rock fragments,
DATE: 18-02-2008
cementation, etc.), the density may be described in accordance with the following
CHK’D BY:
presumptive relationship:
APPROVED
NUMBER OF BLOWS (N)
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT PRESUMPTIVE DENSITY PER 305 mm (12 in.)

Very Loose 0–5

Loose 6 – 11

OPERATING DEPARTMENT Medium 12 – 23

______________________________
Dense 24 – 35
______________________________

______________________________ Very Dense 36 – 50

CERTIFIED
(Not applicable without
further description) Over 50
BY:
MSM 3.03 CONSISTENCY OF SOILS
DATE:

The consistency of cohesive clays and silts (where applicable) shall be described in
accordance with the following:

A. Test Pits

THIS DRAWING IS NOT 1) Very Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by fist
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING 2) Soft - Easily penetrated several inches by thumb
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

3) Medium - Can be penetrated several inches by thumb with moderate effort

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 40
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

4) Very Stiff - Readily indented by thumbnail

CHK’D

5) Hard - Indented with difficulty by thumbnail

B. Soil Borings
DESCRIPTION

The consistency of cohesive soils encountered in test borings shall be described

primarily on the basis of unconfined compressive strength either from actual laboratory
tests or estimated strength of samples based on pocket penetrometer results or the
evaluations described in paragraph A, above. Consistency descriptions are shown
below for various ranges of unconfined compressive strength. The use of SPT values
without benefit of other evaluations is not acceptable. Where supporting data is
available, correlations of presumptive SPT/consistency relationship should be
NO.

1
3

established for a given location or site. Where adequate data are not available, the
REVISIONS
consistency may be described on the basis of the presumptive relationship shown
below, only if it is clearly indicated on the log as such:
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
RANGE OF UNCONFINED
CHK’D BY:
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH NO. OF BLOWS (N)
CONSISTENCY t/ft2 or kg/cm2 PER 305 mm (12 in.)
APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT Very Soft Less than 0.25 Less than 2
Soft 0.25 to 0.50 2 to 4
Medium Stiff 0.50 to 1.00 5 to 8
Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 9 to 15
Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 16 to 30
Hard Greater than 4.00 Greater than 30
OPERATING DEPARTMENT

3.04 CEMENTED OVERBURDEN MATERIALS

______________________________

______________________________ The nature and degree of cementation shall be completely described. The terminology
______________________________ used to describe cementation shall be defined in the report.

CERTIFIED
3.05 ROCK

After identification of major rock type on the log, the physical properties shall be described
BY:
MSM in accordance with descriptive adjectives or numbers as shown in Table III-2 and in the
DATE:
following sequence:

A. Bedding Characteristics – including thin beds or interbedded materials of

different types of rock

B. Lithologic Characteristics
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
C. Hardness and Degree of Cementation
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED D. Texture

E. Structure (including Degree of Fracturing and/or Fragmentation)

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 41
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

F. Degree of Weathering

G. Solution and Void Conditions

H. Swelling Properties
DESCRIPTION

I. Slaking Properties

3.06 FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS

All notes recorded on field logs pertinent to the evaluation and analysis of subsurface
conditions shall be transcribed on the final logs, with particular emphasis on ground water
NO.

1
3

conditions and general drilling operations experienced in test borings. Other records and
REVISIONS
observations, including subsequent variations in piezometric records of ground water
elevations shall also be incorporated in the final logs where applicable.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
3.07 FINAL LOGS
CHK’D BY:

Examples of final logs of test borings and test pits are illustrated on Plates III-1 and III-1a,
APPROVED
utilizing COMPANY Standard Form 15109 (11/83). Blank copies of these forms will be
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT available to the CONTRACTOR as needed for specific PROJECTS.

OPERATING DEPARTMENT

______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 42
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

SEC BORING LOG

CHK’D

PROJECT No.
LOCATION: CONTRACTOR:
NORTH: TYPE OF BORING:
COORDINATES BORING NO.
EAST: DIA. OF BORING:
GROUND ELEVATION: DIA. OF UNDISTURBED SAMPLE: DATE COMMENCED:
DESCRIPTION

DEPTH AT GROUNDWATER TABLE: ________ CASING HAMMER WT. & DROP: DATE COMPLETED:
MEASURED AT: ________ HOURS, ON ______ SAMPLING HAMMER WT. & DROP: SUPERVISOR:

CLASSIFICATION

DEPTH IN FEET
SAMPLE TYPE

DRY DENSITY

SOIL SYMBOL
CONTENT %
BLOWS PER

kg/cu. Meter
MOISTURE
SAMPLER
DEPTH IN

NUMBER
METERS

15 cm
AND

DESCRIPTION REMARKS
NO.

_
2

1
3

REVISIONS 1

_ 5
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
2
CHK’D BY:

APPROVED 3 10
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
_

_ 15

5
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
_

6 20
______________________________

______________________________
_
______________________________

CERTIFIED _ 25

8
BY:
MSM
DATE: _

9 30

10 33
LEGEND:
SPT 1: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST & NUMBER
THIS DRAWING IS NOT U 1: UNDISTURBED THIN WALL TUBE SAMPLE & NUMBER
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR R 1: ROCK CORE RUN & NUMBER
FOR ORDERING D 1: DENISON SAMPLE & NUMBER
MATERIALS UNTIL
RQD : ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION
CERTIFIED AND DATED
REC : RECOVERY SHEET 1 OF 2

PLATE III - 1

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 43
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

SEC BORING LOG

PROJECT No.
STATION/COORDINANORTH:
BORING NO.
RACTOR:

CLASSIFICATION

DEPTH IN FEET
SAMPLE TYPE

DRY DENSITY

SOIL SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION

CONTENT %
BLOWS PER

kg/cu. Meter
MOISTURE
SAMPLER
DEPTH IN

NUMBER
METERS

15 cm
AND
DESCRIPTION REMARKS

_ 35

11
NO.

1
3

_
REVISIONS
12 40

PREPARED BY: TEQ _

DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
13

_ 45

APPROVED
14
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
_

15 50

16
OPERATING DEPARTMENT
_ 55

______________________________ 17

______________________________
_
______________________________

18 60

CERTIFIED _

19
BY:
MSM
DATE: _ 65

20
LEGEND:
SPT 1: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST & NUMBER
U 1: UNDISTURBED THIN WALL TUBE SAMPLE & NUMBER
R 1: ROCK CORE RUN & NUMBER
D 1: DENISON SAMPLE & NUMBER
THIS DRAWING IS NOT RQD : ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
REC : RECOVERY SHEET 2 OF 2
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED PLATE III - 1a

* END OF SECTION III *

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 44
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

SECTION IV – GUIDELINES FOR PREPARATION OF GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

CHK’D

4.01 GENERAL

The wide variation of the scope of services required for individual COMPANY PROJECTS
precludes the use of a single format for all PROJECTS. However, most investigations will
DESCRIPTION

be considered to be either Preliminary Investigations or, Detailed Investigations for Final

Design; and, the report should be so identified where applicable. These Guidelines outline
the general format for reports for both types of investigations – the reports differing only in
the scope of WORK included therein.

4.02 SCOPE
NO.

1
3

The results of the investigations shall be presented in a final report, which shall be written
REVISIONS
for the purpose of assisting and guiding designers in making their decisions. Discussion of
broad regional physiographic and geological features will be limited to the tangible
PREPARED BY: TEQ
engineering significance and a reasonable understanding of these features in the
DATE: 18-02-2008
selection of a site and determination of the appropriate design. The discussion shall be
CHK’D BY:
focused principally on description of rock, soil and ground water conditions that are
significant in the design or will affect construction. The discussion shall be supplemented
APPROVED
by geologic maps, cross-sections and boring logs as applicable to clearly illustrate existing
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT conditions and the relationships of these conditions to the PROJECT. In support of its
conclusions, the discussion shall present the result of field and laboratory investigations in
relation to the designs recommended in development of the PROJECT. The report shall
contain specific design recommendations. Technical terms used in the report shall be
clearly defined and used consistently throughout the report. Where variable subsurface
conditions exist, generalized recommendations will not be satisfactory. Specific
OPERATING DEPARTMENT recommendations will be made for specific PROJECT areas or variations in foundation
conditions.
______________________________

______________________________ 4.03 FORMAT

______________________________

The final report shall consist of, but not limited to, an effective combination of discussions,
CERTIFIED
tabulated data, laboratory testing results, backup calculations, soil and geological
illustrations, and reference bibliography to depict the conditions that are of engineering
significance. The discussion in the foundation report should always include alternate
BY:
MSM foundation systems. The presentation shall include the following:
DATE:

A. Summary

As a preamble to the report, a cover letter in the form of a summary shall be prepared.
This letter shall summarize the site description, the surface and subsurface soil
conditions and properties, the resulting engineering considerations, and
THIS DRAWING IS NOT recommendations for design of foundations and other elements of construction
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
influenced by subsurface conditions.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED B. Scope of Work

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 45
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

The Scope of Work shall describe the type of design information that is to be furnished
CHK’D

by the report; e.g., for design of foundations for overhead transmission lines, substation
buildings or other types of structures, slabs-on-grade, roads, parking areas, deep
excavations, pipelines, buried cables, cable tunnels, etc., as well as the description of
the scope of the investigation conducted by the CONTRACTOR.
DESCRIPTION

C. PROJECT Description

The PROJECT Description shall include the geographic location of the site with respect
to existing landmarks, populated areas, etc., the type of construction; the structural
characteristics including the allowable total and differential settlement; moments,
thrusts (including uplift) and vibratory loads imposed on foundations; nearness to
existing or planned structures; and any other special foundation design considerations.
NO.

1
3

Where some elements of the PROJECT description are not known at the time of the
REVISIONS
preparation of the report, the COMPANY shall provide best estimates for these
elements and the report shall clearly indicate that these are estimates.
PREPARED BY: TEQ

DATE: 18-02-2008
D. Site Conditions
CHK’D BY:

The existing surface conditions at site shall be described as to grades, access,

APPROVED
drainage and/or any other feature, which may have a bearing on the WORK, including,
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT where appropriate:

1) Significant and controlling topographic conditions

2) Geomorphology

OPERATING DEPARTMENT 3) Existing construction and/or evidence of previous constructions and man-made site
alterations (e.g., grading, dumping, etc.)
______________________________

______________________________ 4) Vegetation and land use

______________________________

5) Evidence of ground water and water levels in existing wells or exposures

CERTIFIED
E. Field Investigations
BY:
MSM The section on Field Investigation shall describe the type of equipment used; the
DATE:
number, location, diameter and depth of borings or other types of explorations; the
working procedures; sampling methods and frequency; and type of field tests
performed. Where piezometers have been installed, the type, depth and location, as
well as an accurate as-installed drawing of each piezometer shall be included. Logs of
explorations and the results of all field tests shall also be part of this section. This
section may be presented in a separate volume if voluminous.
THIS DRAWING IS NOT
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
F. Laboratory Tests
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED The section on Laboratory Tests shall contain a description of the sample extraction
procedure, the type of tests performed and all test results. This section may also be
presented in a separate volume if voluminous.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 46
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D
CHK’D

G. Subsurface Conditions

The section of Subsurface Conditions shall give a detailed description of the

subsurface materials at the site. Ground water conditions (including artesian) shall be
discussed. Drawings of subsurface profiles shall be included where necessary or
DESCRIPTION

desirable to illustrate subsurface conditions. Where appropriate, this section shall also
include: description of geology with a special discussion concerning composition and
structure of the rocks; engineering description of soils and the relationship of soil to the
bedrock; principal engineering properties of the rock and soil as determined by
conventional field and laboratory investigations; and, foundation conditions that present
special engineering problems.
NO.

1
3

H. Engineering Analysis
REVISIONS

The section on Engineering Analysis shall contain a description of the geotechnical

PREPARED BY: TEQ
considerations involved in developing a suitable foundation system for the PROJECT
DATE: 18-02-2008
structures. A statement of the analysis performed to evaluate the foundation
CHK’D BY:
requirements and the results of these analyses, shall be included, as well as a study of
alternate foundation systems where applicable. Settlement criteria and the results of
APPROVED
settlement analyses shall be described. Consideration of ground water and its chemical
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT effect on foundation concrete and rebar shall be discussed. Ground water, as related to
excavations and to foundations located near or below the ground water table, shall be
discussed. For all foundation cases, the factor of safety employed in the analysis, shall
be stated; and, both "ultimate" and "allowable" values of the appropriate geotechnical
design parameters shall be provided. "Net-allowable" stresses shall be defined.
Specific geotechnical parameters to be used for design shall be supported by
OPERATING DEPARTMENT computations based on an acceptable method of analysis. Computations do not need
to be included in the report but, shall be retained in permanent files by the
______________________________
CONTRACTOR; and, copies provided to the COMPANY upon request. Alternate
______________________________ foundation designs shall be presented along with consideration of construction
______________________________ problems and current use of foundation construction techniques as practiced in the
SEC System.
CERTIFIED
I. Recommendations
BY:
MSM The section on Recommendations shall give clear, concise, positive recommendations
DATE:
of the design criteria for each type of foundations, which is to be used, to govern the
design of all foundations for the PROJECT; and, shall give specific recommendations
for the design of other elements of construction, which may be influenced by
geotechnical considerations, as defined in the scope of WORK for a given PROJECT.
Where appropriate, this shall include:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT 1) Bearing capacities for various types of shallow foundations, e.g. spread footings,
TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
mat, thickened edge slab, etc. Recommend type best suited for site.
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED 2) Deep foundation capacities; including drilled piers, caissons, driven piles, etc.
Discuss tension, compression and lateral capacity of foundation system.

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 47
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

3) Estimated foundation settlements or swell

CHK’D

4) CBR and "K" values for pavement and floor slab design

5) Lateral earth pressures (active, passive, at-rest, etc.)

DESCRIPTION

6) Potential seismic and dynamic soil problems

7) Slope stability, soil and rock

8) Site development including site preparation and filling

9) Foundation and subsurface construction excavation

NO.

1
3

REVISIONS
10) Ground water considerations
PREPARED BY: TEQ
11) Drilling and blasting problems
DATE: 18-02-2008

CHK’D BY:
12) Rock bolting and anchoring problems
APPROVED
13) Special foundation treatments, e.g. surcharging, unsuitable material replacement,
TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT grouting, etc.

14) Recommended elevation for foundations

15) Recommendations for further investigation and analysis, if required

OPERATING DEPARTMENT J. Certification

______________________________
Both the engineer responsible for the foundation analysis and a principal of the
______________________________ COMPANY shall certify the accuracy of the contents of the report by affixing their
______________________________ signatures thereto.

CERTIFIED
K. Illustrations

The illustrations provided with the report do not necessarily require a separate section.
BY:
MSM Illustrative material including any of the following that are applicable to the PROJECT
DATE:
will be used in the final report.

1) PROJECT Location Map

2) Plan of Exploration

THIS DRAWING IS NOT 3) Logs of Explorations

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR
MATERIALS
ORDERING
UNTIL
4) Test Data and Resulting Charts
CERTIFIED AND DATED

5) Site Geology Map

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 48
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49
CERT.
SAUDI ELECTRICITY COMPANY ‫اﻟﺸﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
APP’D

6) Top of Rock Contour Map

CHK’D

7) Geologic Structure Map

8) Soils and/or rock cross-sections shall show correlation of overburden and rock units
including such significant features as water levels, water losses, core losses, and
DESCRIPTION

solution zones. Cross-sections shall emphasize geologic structure, show depths of

primary and secondary weathering, and interpret top of rock for construction
purposes.

9) Photographs of all rock cores recovered as well as photos illustrating pertinent site
conditions. All photos shall have the following information on the back of the photo
or under the photo, if it is mounted: Name of PROJECT, site location, date of photo,
NO.

1
3

CONTRACTOR, location of photographer and direction that the photo is viewing, a

REVISIONS
brief description of main points in photo, name of photographer, a sequential
number for each photo and notes showing if photo is a "Pan-View". An arrow
PREPARED BY: TEQ
showing number, location and direction of the photo will be noted on the plan of
DATE: 18-02-2008
explorations for the PROJECT. Negatives for field photos and core photos will be
CHK’D BY:
retained by the CONTRACTOR in a permanent file.
APPROVED

TRANSMISSION ASSET
PLANNING DEPARTMENT *** END OF SECTION IV ***

OPERATING DEPARTMENT REFERENCES:

______________________________
1. Lambe - Soil Testing for Engineers
______________________________ 2. ASTM - Procedures for Testing Soils
______________________________

CERTIFIED

BY:
MSM
DATE:

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

TO BE USED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OR
FOR ORDERING
MATERIALS UNTIL
CERTIFIED AND DATED

TEQ/ROT – 10/25/08

SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLANT NO. INDEX DOCUMENT NO. PAGE NO. REV.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION AND MATERIAL TESTING
JOB ORDER NO. FOR 380kV SUBSTATIONS 49
T238 A PTS-08EM313 OF 0
SAUDI ARABIA
49

MORTH Specification Book 4th Revision
78% (49)
MORTH Specification Book 4th Revision
618 pages
Checklist - Concrete Structure Drawing
100% (2)
Checklist - Concrete Structure Drawing
2 pages
Substation Bldg. and Site Dev't. TES-P-119-19-R1
33% (3)
Substation Bldg. and Site Dev't. TES-P-119-19-R1
44 pages
Technical. Specs. EMCOR Showroom Tiguma, Pagadian
No ratings yet
Technical. Specs. EMCOR Showroom Tiguma, Pagadian
85 pages
Master Diploma in Piping Design and Stress Analysis
100% (1)
Master Diploma in Piping Design and Stress Analysis
2 pages
Zack Snyders Justice League 2021 720p WEBRip x264 AAC - (YTS MX)
No ratings yet
Zack Snyders Justice League 2021 720p WEBRip x264 AAC - (YTS MX)
423 pages
Concrete Pouring Permit Form
No ratings yet
Concrete Pouring Permit Form
1 page
Outrigger
No ratings yet
Outrigger
54 pages
S 000 5316 201 (Underground Pipe Design Rev.1)
No ratings yet
S 000 5316 201 (Underground Pipe Design Rev.1)
9 pages
Input From Vendor For FEED Study Rev. 0 - Checklist PDF
No ratings yet
Input From Vendor For FEED Study Rev. 0 - Checklist PDF
1 page
XX X XXXX XX XXXX 1rev XX Tank Farm Sleeper Design
0% (1)
XX X XXXX XX XXXX 1rev XX Tank Farm Sleeper Design
44 pages
IOTDE-PIP-CL-006 Rev 0 Check List For Stress Analysis
No ratings yet
IOTDE-PIP-CL-006 Rev 0 Check List For Stress Analysis
4 pages
MEP-P-ES-002-Standard Design Requirements For Piping Systems
No ratings yet
MEP-P-ES-002-Standard Design Requirements For Piping Systems
19 pages
Lead Stress Engineer Ref Manual
No ratings yet
Lead Stress Engineer Ref Manual
8 pages
Xxxx-Spe-Xxx - Mto Format
No ratings yet
Xxxx-Spe-Xxx - Mto Format
10 pages
A Civ Spe 000 30002 1
No ratings yet
A Civ Spe 000 30002 1
30 pages
Isometric Manual
100% (1)
Isometric Manual
28 pages
2004-D-Piping Specialities
No ratings yet
2004-D-Piping Specialities
24 pages
Caesar - Powerpoint
100% (1)
Caesar - Powerpoint
22 pages
3 Major Design Philosophies - Working Stress, Ultimate Load and Limit State - CivilDigital
No ratings yet
3 Major Design Philosophies - Working Stress, Ultimate Load and Limit State - CivilDigital
6 pages
Minimum Pipe Spacing Chart For Petrochemical & Refinery Plants PDF
100% (1)
Minimum Pipe Spacing Chart For Petrochemical & Refinery Plants PDF
4 pages
EGP3-03.04 Piping Layout, Support and Flexibility
No ratings yet
EGP3-03.04 Piping Layout, Support and Flexibility
59 pages
Chemcial - Design Considerations For Petrochemical Plant - ASSE Article
No ratings yet
Chemcial - Design Considerations For Petrochemical Plant - ASSE Article
6 pages
PWD-E041-CNS-WKP-CNL-0000-00003-00 Rev3
No ratings yet
PWD-E041-CNS-WKP-CNL-0000-00003-00 Rev3
13 pages
Specification - Pipes Flanges
No ratings yet
Specification - Pipes Flanges
3 pages
HFY-PIP-SP-00012 X Specification For Expansion Joint - A-Commented
No ratings yet
HFY-PIP-SP-00012 X Specification For Expansion Joint - A-Commented
9 pages
Wear Pad Thickness Consolidated-Final
100% (1)
Wear Pad Thickness Consolidated-Final
1 page
Hydrant Water Tank Foundation Design Calc - Ebocha1
No ratings yet
Hydrant Water Tank Foundation Design Calc - Ebocha1
39 pages
+GRRS-49 Piping Stress Analysis Report Rev. 0
100% (1)
+GRRS-49 Piping Stress Analysis Report Rev. 0
31 pages
Barabanki Stability Analysis
No ratings yet
Barabanki Stability Analysis
2 pages
Boltight DS-15
No ratings yet
Boltight DS-15
3 pages
PNFS0500 (Extract From PNFS0001)
No ratings yet
PNFS0500 (Extract From PNFS0001)
14 pages
Exxon Mobil Matls Lab A105N Vs A350LF2 GrainSize PDF
No ratings yet
Exxon Mobil Matls Lab A105N Vs A350LF2 GrainSize PDF
5 pages
260543D01 - D08, Underground Electrical Manhole and Duct Bank Const. Detail
No ratings yet
260543D01 - D08, Underground Electrical Manhole and Duct Bank Const. Detail
8 pages
DGS 1482-002 REV 2 - Sanitary Storm Sewer and Culverts
No ratings yet
DGS 1482-002 REV 2 - Sanitary Storm Sewer and Culverts
13 pages
Structural Steel Design CIV413: Group Members
No ratings yet
Structural Steel Design CIV413: Group Members
9 pages
Criteria For Pipe Stress Analysis
No ratings yet
Criteria For Pipe Stress Analysis
3 pages
Configuration File Check List For Stress Analysis of Piping Systems
No ratings yet
Configuration File Check List For Stress Analysis of Piping Systems
2 pages
Piping-Design Requirements PDF
No ratings yet
Piping-Design Requirements PDF
6 pages
EC-PI-P004 Piping Checking
No ratings yet
EC-PI-P004 Piping Checking
5 pages
Pipe Rack Sizing and Loading Data
No ratings yet
Pipe Rack Sizing and Loading Data
7 pages
Dokumen - Tips - Storage Tank Piping 79720 Ps 002 Stress Analysis System Documentation Calculations
100% (1)
Dokumen - Tips - Storage Tank Piping 79720 Ps 002 Stress Analysis System Documentation Calculations
25 pages
Type of Drgs and IDC Draft 4-6-19
No ratings yet
Type of Drgs and IDC Draft 4-6-19
31 pages
CAESAR II Input Echo and Output
100% (1)
CAESAR II Input Echo and Output
264 pages
Okpoho Piping MTO
No ratings yet
Okpoho Piping MTO
39 pages
PGHU-EH-LSPDS-001209 R1 General Requirement For Valves
No ratings yet
PGHU-EH-LSPDS-001209 R1 General Requirement For Valves
13 pages
1 01 99 93 1612
No ratings yet
1 01 99 93 1612
35 pages
Xyz
No ratings yet
Xyz
64 pages
Flame Arrestor Procurement Spec.
No ratings yet
Flame Arrestor Procurement Spec.
2 pages
MR For Pipeline Bulk Materials, Rev.A
No ratings yet
MR For Pipeline Bulk Materials, Rev.A
31 pages
OAG X160 050 GDL 001 PED Guidelines For Compliance
No ratings yet
OAG X160 050 GDL 001 PED Guidelines For Compliance
82 pages
DGS-2010-001 Design Basis
No ratings yet
DGS-2010-001 Design Basis
19 pages
Engineering For Plant Safety
100% (1)
Engineering For Plant Safety
9 pages
Petrofac International LTD.: Document Transmittal
No ratings yet
Petrofac International LTD.: Document Transmittal
2 pages
GSW NG01017640 GEN LA7880 00004 - Technical Specifications For Pipeline Valves - D01
100% (1)
GSW NG01017640 GEN LA7880 00004 - Technical Specifications For Pipeline Valves - D01
23 pages
PSV Connection System PDF
No ratings yet
PSV Connection System PDF
8 pages
Checklist of Support Design
No ratings yet
Checklist of Support Design
2 pages
50B10 Standard Assembly Library
No ratings yet
50B10 Standard Assembly Library
78 pages
Pipe Support PDF
100% (1)
Pipe Support PDF
98 pages
Key Responsibilities of Piping Stress Engineer
No ratings yet
Key Responsibilities of Piping Stress Engineer
3 pages
Iranian Petroleum Standards: Typical Unit Arrangement & Piperack Layout IPS-D-PI-102
No ratings yet
Iranian Petroleum Standards: Typical Unit Arrangement & Piperack Layout IPS-D-PI-102
1 page
PTS Appendix-Vlll
No ratings yet
PTS Appendix-Vlll
99 pages
SEC Document
No ratings yet
SEC Document
233 pages
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
No ratings yet
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
23 pages
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
50% (2)
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
23 pages
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
No ratings yet
Substation Layout: Design and Considerations
20 pages
architectural-mall-urethane-catalog
No ratings yet
architectural-mall-urethane-catalog
52 pages
Precast Design Reference As Per SEC
No ratings yet
Precast Design Reference As Per SEC
43 pages
Sac Erp
No ratings yet
Sac Erp
15 pages
ProLock Luxury Collection 160320
No ratings yet
ProLock Luxury Collection 160320
28 pages
Making Living Easy.: Biometric Wardrobe Lock
No ratings yet
Making Living Easy.: Biometric Wardrobe Lock
2 pages
Yale Pricelist 2021
No ratings yet
Yale Pricelist 2021
50 pages
King Abdul Aziz Road Project - Package-A 1Bs-04 Taj Five Star Hotel
No ratings yet
King Abdul Aziz Road Project - Package-A 1Bs-04 Taj Five Star Hotel
1 page
Precast Kaar-Omr-Pa-Cc-Zn1-Bn03-Fwi-Spc-Cbs-01c1-3
No ratings yet
Precast Kaar-Omr-Pa-Cc-Zn1-Bn03-Fwi-Spc-Cbs-01c1-3
7 pages
33 05 61 Concrete Manholes
No ratings yet
33 05 61 Concrete Manholes
99 pages
Seeds Ii R1 PDF
No ratings yet
Seeds Ii R1 PDF
42 pages
SEIKA-High Performance Superplasticiser
No ratings yet
SEIKA-High Performance Superplasticiser
118 pages
GRIHA v.2019 DD2 - Manipal University Jaipur
No ratings yet
GRIHA v.2019 DD2 - Manipal University Jaipur
47 pages
Design of T Girder JUNE 14TH
No ratings yet
Design of T Girder JUNE 14TH
71 pages
Effect of Artificial Sand On Compressive Strength and Workability of Concrete in Optimum Replacement
No ratings yet
Effect of Artificial Sand On Compressive Strength and Workability of Concrete in Optimum Replacement
7 pages
Public Works Inspectors Manual 7th Edition Silas B. Birch 2024 scribd download
100% (4)
Public Works Inspectors Manual 7th Edition Silas B. Birch 2024 scribd download
81 pages
Evaluation of The Shear Capacity of Precast-Prestressed Hollow Core Slabs: Numerical and Experimental Comparisons
No ratings yet
Evaluation of The Shear Capacity of Precast-Prestressed Hollow Core Slabs: Numerical and Experimental Comparisons
19 pages
Wisconsin Commercial Building Code
No ratings yet
Wisconsin Commercial Building Code
103 pages
CEC 242 C. Management 1st Handout
No ratings yet
CEC 242 C. Management 1st Handout
25 pages
PRECAST ROOFING & FLOORING SYSTEMS - SD
No ratings yet
PRECAST ROOFING & FLOORING SYSTEMS - SD
14 pages
Method Statement To Seal The Opening
No ratings yet
Method Statement To Seal The Opening
3 pages
Roman Archy Material Seminar
No ratings yet
Roman Archy Material Seminar
37 pages
(BS 1881-124) - Testing Concrete. Part 124. Methods For Analysis of Hardened Concrete PDF
33% (3)
(BS 1881-124) - Testing Concrete. Part 124. Methods For Analysis of Hardened Concrete PDF
45 pages
Brochure Alsina Usa
No ratings yet
Brochure Alsina Usa
28 pages
Session Details Oct 3
No ratings yet
Session Details Oct 3
8 pages
Footing Design As Per BS 8110 PDF
No ratings yet
Footing Design As Per BS 8110 PDF
1 page
Hoek Carranza-Torres 2008
No ratings yet
Hoek Carranza-Torres 2008
54 pages
Thesis
No ratings yet
Thesis
44 pages
BS 8007
No ratings yet
BS 8007
31 pages
Birdnest Stadium
No ratings yet
Birdnest Stadium
4 pages
Presentation - 10821 - ES10821 - Composite Beam Design Extension in Robot Structural Analysis Profressional 2016 PDF
No ratings yet
Presentation - 10821 - ES10821 - Composite Beam Design Extension in Robot Structural Analysis Profressional 2016 PDF
87 pages
Oasis Pool Waterfall Original
No ratings yet
Oasis Pool Waterfall Original
5 pages
ARC215- L1- stages of building construction
No ratings yet
ARC215- L1- stages of building construction
18 pages
Manholes Brochure
No ratings yet
Manholes Brochure
4 pages
S.D.M. Office First Floor Estimate: Staire Case Col
100% (1)
S.D.M. Office First Floor Estimate: Staire Case Col
7 pages
Guidelines For Construction of Single Storey House in Pakistan
0% (1)
Guidelines For Construction of Single Storey House in Pakistan
3 pages

Appendix VIII - Civil and Structural Scope of Work

Uploaded by

Appendix VIII - Civil and Structural Scope of Work

Uploaded by

APPENDIX- VIII

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

PREPAlOD BY: ROL

C ,4 IJIL".:.., CONSTRUCTION OF SHEDGUM-2 380/115kV BSP

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORK

a. 380kV GIS building with cable tunnel and stepped access

7. Design and construction of cable tunnels/ductbanks as shown in Drawing ET-908861 at

14. Design and construct the concrete foundations of PACUs.

15. Provide and install raised floor at the communication room.

Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

a. Clause 2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

(ATIACHMENT TO SCHEDULE "B" OF CONTRACT NO 1 )

JOB ORDER NO. APPENDIX-VIlib 1

DATE: 2.01 GENERAL 11

2.23 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 32

2.29 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER FOUNDATIONS 34

III MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

~~:l 3.01 GENERAL 44

3.14 BACKFILL MATERIALS 60

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

SECTION I - STRUCTURAUCIVIL DESIGN CRITERIA

OPERATINGDEPARTMENT B. Conflicts and Deviations

The purposes of calculations are as follows:

Assumptions on which calculations are based shall be listed in an orderly manner.

CONTRACTOR shall clearly spell out the analysis/design methodology/philosophy

1. The heading shall provide the following information:

2. Table of Contents and list of all codes and references used

4. Calculations shall have sufficient number of sub-headings to indicate clearly what is

5. Sufficient explanation shall be given so that calculation methods are easily

6. Calculations are to be in the English language throughout.

7. The cover sheet of each calculation package shall be assigned a COMPANY

8. Calculation packages should be limited to pertinent information, voided calculation

9. Design calculations shall be prepared in computer excel sheets in company

3. Computer programs such as STAAD.Pro 2007 is acceptable programs.

1.03 CONCRETE STRUCTURES

C. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement,

1.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURES

E. For foundation reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete

1.05 LAnlCED STEEL GANTRYITAKE-OFF STRUCTURES

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

B. Structural members shall be fabricated from materials conforming to 20-TMSS-01, Rev.

C. The gantry/take-off structure foundations shall be designed as per the requirements of

I ACI 318M-05 "Building Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary".

D. For reinforcement detailing, ACI-315 "Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement",

"*** END OF SECTION I "***

I'IlEPARm BY: _-='--1

TIllS DRAWING IS NOT

SECTION II - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR

PREPARED BY; ROL

2.06 ASPHALT ACCESS ROAD TO SUBSTATION

PREPARED BY: ROL

2.07 REMOVAL OF SAND DUNES AND SAND STABILIZATION

Slope protection shall be as recommended in TCS-Q-113.02.

2.09 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL BUILDINGS WITH CABLE BASEMENT

Cable Basement clear height 3.30m

I. Building superstructures shall be reinforced concrete with precast concrete structural

I Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

Building substructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

I minimum thickness of 100mm. The walls shall be reinforced with vertical/horizontal

Door Type Location Minimum door size

X. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communications

Depth of raised floor system shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR to provide

screws. The plates/signboards shall be of aluminum with durable baked enamel

PREPARED BY: 1l0L

GIS room 7.00 m

Minimum hook height 5.00 m

Control room, battery room, communications room, workshop

I to prevent ingress of sand, dust and water.

Precast concrete superstructures shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 16 of ACI

Building substructures shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete.

1. Lock: Stainless and heat resistant chromium-nickel as per ASTM A167

THIS DRAWING IS NOT

Y. Suspended/dropped false ceiling shall be provided at control room, communication room,

"* END OF SECTION I "*